Gryphon GM4100 - Barcode Reader DATALOGIC - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Gryphon GM4100 DATALOGIC

General Purpose Handheld Linear Imager or Laser Bar Code Readers

Gryphon I GD4100/GM4100

Gryphon BT4100/ L GD4300

Two black and white barcode scanner devices, one with a digital display and blue buttons, the other with a logo (no visible text or symbols on device body)

Barcode image with blue and gray vertical bars on the left and a QR code on the right

Product Reference Guide

Datalogic ADC, Inc.

959 Terry Street

Eugene, OR 97402

USA

Telephone: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

©2011-2016 Datalogic, Inc.

An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic ADC, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or 'Datalogic ADC"). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.

Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.

Disclaimer

Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.

Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents

See www.patents.datalogic.com for patent list.

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION 9

About this Manual 9

Overview 9

Manual Conventions 10

References 10

Technical Support 10

Datalogic Website Support 10

Reseller Technical Support 10

Telephone Technical Support 10

About the Reader 11

The BC40xx™ Radio Base 11

Base LEDs 11

Base Button 12

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection 12

Display 14

Battery Safety 14

Programming the Reader 16

Configuration Methods 16

SETUP 17

Unpacking 17

Setting Up the Reader 17

Installing the Interface Cable 18

Configuring the Base Station 20

Changing the Base Station Position 21

Connecting the Base Station 22

Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled 25

Linking the Reader to a Base Station 25

Linking a BT Reader to a PC 26

GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts 27

Stand Alone Layouts 27

Interface Selection 29

Setting the Interface 29

Customizing Configuration Settings 33

Configure Interface Settings 33

Global Interface Features 33

Configuring Other Features 33

Software Version Transmission 33

Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults 34

Replacing the Battery 35

CONFIGURATION USING BARCODES 37

Configuration Parameters ....37

Reading Configuration Barcodes 38

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES 39

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore 39

USB Suspend Mode 39

RS-232 ONLY Interface 41

Baud Rate 42

Data Bits 43

Stop Bits 43

Parity 44

Handshaking Control 45

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces....46

Intercharacter Delay 47

Beep On ASCII BEL 47

Beep On Not on File 48
ACK NAK Options 49
ACK Character 50
NAK Character 50
ACK NAK Timeout Value ....51
ACK NAK Retry Count 51
ACK NAK Error Handling 52
Indicate Transmission Failure 52
Disable Character 53
Enable Character 53
Country Mode 56
Caps Lock State 59
Numlock 60
Send Control Characters 61
Wedge Quiet Interval 62
Intercharacter Delay 63
Intercode Delay 64
USB Keyboard Speed 65
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad 66
USB-OEM Device Usage 68
Interface Options 68
46xx Number of Host Resets 70
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ....72
Interface Options 72
Wand Signal Speed 74
Wand Polarity 74
Wand Idle State 75
Transmit Noise 75
Label Symbology Conversion 76
Global Prefix/Suffix 78
Global AIM ID 79
GS1-128 AIM ID 80
Label ID 81
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets 81
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology 81
Label ID Control 82
Label ID Symbology Selection 83
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters 89
Case Conversion 90
Character Conversion 90
Double Read Timeout 92
Label Gone Timeout 93
Sleep Mode Timeout 94
Power On Alert 96
Good Read: When to Indicate 96
Good Read Beep Type 97
Good Read Beep Frequency 97
Good Read Beep Length 98
Good Read Beep Volume 99
Good Read LED Duration 100
Scan Mode 101
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout 102
Stand Detection 103

Keyboard Interface....55

USB-OEM Interface 67

IBM 46XX Interface....69

Wand Emulation Interface 73

Data Format 77

Reading Parameters 91

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS 96

SCANNING FEATURES ....101

Stand Mode Sensitivity 104

Scanning Active Time 104

Flash On Time 105

Flash Off Time 105

Green Spot Duration 106

Code Selection 107

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES 108

CODE EAN/UPC 109

Coupon Control 109

UPC-A 110

UPC-A Enable/Disable 110

UPC-A Check Character Transmission 110

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 111

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission 111

UPC-A Minimum Reads 112

UPC-E 113

UPC-E Enable/Disable 113

UPC-E Check Character Transmission 113

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 114

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A 114

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission 115

UPC-E Minimum Reads 115

GTIN FORMATTING 116

EAN 13 (JAN 13) 117

EAN 13 Enable/Disable 117

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission 117

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character 118

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion 118

EAN 13 Minimum Reads 119

ISSN 120

ISSN Enable/Disable 120

EAN 8 (JAN 8) 121

EAN 8 Enable/Disable 121

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission 121

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 122

EAN 8 Minimum Reads 122

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS 123

UPC/EAN Decoding Level 123

UPC/EAN Correlation 124

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check 124

In-Store Minimum Reads 125

ADD-ONS 126

Optional Add-ons 126

Optional Add-On Timer 127

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer 130

P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads 133

P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads 134

GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads 135

CODE 39 136

Code 39 Enable/Disable 136

Code 39 Check Character Calculation ....136

Code 39 Check Character Transmission 137

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission 138

Code 39 Full ASCII 138

Code 39 Quiet Zones 139

Code 39 Minimum Reads 140

Code 39 Decoding Level 141

Code 39 Length Control 142

Code 39 Set Length 1 143

Code 39 Set Length 2 144

Code 39 Interdigit Ratio 145

Code 39 Character Correlation ....147

Code 39 Stitching 147

CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) 148

Code 32 Enable/Disable 148
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions 148
Code 32 Check Char Transmission 149
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission 149

CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) 150

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable 150

CODE 128 ....151

Code 128 Enable/Disable .... 151
Expand Code 128 to Code 39 .... 151
Code 128 Check Character Transmission .... 152
Code 128 Function Character Transmission 152
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission 153
Code 128 Quiet Zones 154
Code 128 Minimum Reads 155
Code 128 Decoding Level 156
Code 128 Length Control .... 157
Code 128 Set Length 1 158
Code 128 Set Length 2 159
Code 128 Character Correlation .... 160
Code 128 Stitching 160

GS1-128 161

GS1-128 Enable 161

CODE ISBT 128 162

ISBT 128 Concatenation 162
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation .... 162
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode .... 163
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout 164
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options 164

CODABLOCK F 165

Codablock F Enable/Disable 165
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable 165
Codablock F AIM Check 166
Codablock F Length Control 166
Codablock F Set Length 1 167
Codablock F Set Length 2 168

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) 169

12 of 5 Enable/Disable 169
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation 169
12 of 5 Check Character Transmission .... 170
12 of 5 Minimum Reads 171
2 of 5 Decoding Level 172
12 of 5 Length Control 173
12 of 5 Set Length 1 174
12 of 5 Set Length 2 175
12 of 5 Character Correlation .... 176
12 of 5 Stitching 176

FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ....177

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 177

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR 177

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable 177

STANDARD 2 OF 5 178

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .... 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 179
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ....179
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level 180
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control 180
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 .... 181
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 182
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation .... 183

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching 183

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 184

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 184

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .... 184

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 185

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control 185

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 186

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 187

Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 188

Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching 188

Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation 189

CODEIATA 190

IATA Enable/Disable 190

IATA Check Character Transmission 190

DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 ....191

Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 191

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .... 191

Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 192

Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level 192

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control 193

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1 194

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 195

Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation .... 196

Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching 196

CODABAR 197

Codabar Enable/Disable 197

Codabar Check Character Calculation 197

Codabar Check Character Transmission 198

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission 198

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set 199

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match 199

Codabar Quiet Zones 200

Codabar Minimum Reads 201

Codabar Decoding Level 202

Codabar Length Control 203

Codabar Set Length 1 204

Codabar Set Length 2 205

Codabar Interdigit Ratio 206

Codabar Character Correlation 208

Codabar Stitching 208

ABC CODABAR 209

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable 209

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode 209

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout 210

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation 211

CODE 11 212

Code 11 Enable/Disable 212

Code 11 Check Character Calculation 212

Code 11 Check Character Transmission 213

Code 11 Minimum Reads 213

Code 11 Length Control 214

Code 11 Set Length 1 215

Code 11 Set Length 2 216

Code 11 Interdigit Ratio 217

Code 11 Decoding Level 219

Code 11 Character Correlation 220

Code 11 Stitching 220

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL 221

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable 221

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation 221

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads 222

GS1 DATABARTM EXPANDED 223

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads 224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control 224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 225
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 226

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED 227

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads 228

CODE 93 229

Code 93 Enable/Disable 229
Code 93 Check Character Calculation ...... 229
Code 93 Check Character Transmission 230
Code 93 Length Control 230
Code 93 Set Length 1 231
Code 93 Set Length 2 232
Code 93 Minimum Reads 233
Code 93 Decoding Level 234
Code 93 Quiet Zones 235
Code 93 Stitching 236
Code 93 Character Correlation 236

MSI 237

MSI Enable/Disable 237
MSI Check Character Calculation 237
MSI Check Character Transmission 238
MSI Length Control 238
MSI Set Length 1 239
MSI Set Length 2 240
MSI Minimum Reads 241
MSI Decoding Level 242

PLESSEY 243

Plessey Enable/Disable 243
Plessey Check Character Calculation 244
Plessey Check Character Transmission 244
Plessey Length Control 245
Plessey Set Length 1 246
Plessey Set Length 2 247
Plessey Minimum Reads 248
Plessey Decoding Level 249
Plessey Stitching 250
Plessey Character Correlation 250

CODE 4 251

Code 4 Enable/Disable 251
Code 4 Check Character Transmission 251
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion 252

CODE 5 252

Code 5 Enable/Disable 252
Code 5 Check Character Transmission 253
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion 253

CODE 4 AND CODE 5 COMMON CONFIGURATION ITEMS ......254

Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level 254
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads 255

WIRELESS FEATURES 257

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES 259

Good Transmission Beep 259
Beep Frequency 259
Beep Duration 260
Beep Volume 261
Disconnect Beep 261
Base Station Beep 262

Leash Alarm 262

CONFIGURATION UPDATES 264

Automatic Configuration Update 264

Copy Configuration to Scanner 264

Copy Configuration to Base Station 265

Automatic Flash Update 265

Request Flash Update 266

Powerdown Timeout 266

BATCH FEATURES 268

Batch Mode 268

Send Batch 268

Erase Batch Memory 269

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay 269

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK 270

RF ADDRESS STAMPING 270

Source Radio Address Transmission 270

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character 271

Features for Star Models Only 272

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout 272

STAR Radio Transmit Mode 273

DISPLAY FEATURES 274

Contrast 274

Font Size 274

Backlight 275

Display Mode 275

Display Timeout 276

Keypad Select 278

Bluetooth-Only Features....279

BT SECURITY FEATURES 280

BT Security Mode 280

BT Pin Code 281

Select PIN Code Length 281

Set PIN Code 281

BT HID FEATURES 282

BT HID Variable PIN Code 282

BT HID ALT Mode 282

BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char 283

OTHER BT FEATURES 284

BT Poll Rate 284

LASER FEATURES 287

Laser Scan Angle 288

Laser Idle Mode 288

Bi-Directional Read Decoding 289

Always On Scan Mode Timeout 290

REFERENCES.... 291

RS-232 Parameters 291

RS-232 Only 291

RS-232/USB COM Parameters 292

Keyboard Interface 299

Wedge Quiet Interval 299

Intercharacter Delay 300

Intercode Delay 301

Symbologies 302

Decoding Level 302

Set Length 302

Data Editing 304

Global Prefix/Suffix 305

Global AIM ID 306

Label ID 307

Character Conversion 311

Reading Parameters 312

Contents

Label Gone Timeout 312

Good Read LED Duration 313

Scanning Features 314

Scan Mode 314

Scanning Active Time 315

Flash On Time 316

Flash Off Time 317

Display Settings 318

Display Mode 318

RF Features 318

Configuration Update 318

RF Address Stamping 318

BT-Only Features 321

MESSAGE FORMATTING.... 323

Message Formatting 323

Cursor Control 324

Font Selection 324

Clearing Display 325

LED and Beeper Control 325

Messages from Scanner Command Keys 326

Technical Specifications 327

Standard Cable Pinouts 330

LED and Beeper Indications 331

Error Codes 332

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) 333

Base Station Button Indicators 333

Standard Defaults 335

Sample Bar Codes 347

Keypad 351

Scancode Tables 355

Control Character Emulation 355

Single Press and Release Keys 355

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE 356

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode 358

Digital Interface 360

IBM31xx 102-key 361

IBM XT 362

Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 363

Index 365

Chapter 1 Introduction

About this Manual

z hisvroductx eferencemuideLvx mdisprovidedforusersseekingadvancedtechnicalinformationincludingconnectionprogrammingmaintenanceandspecificationsz hewuickx eferencemuideLwx mandotherpublicationsassociatedwiththisproductaredownloadablefreeofchargefromthewebsitelistedonthebackcoverofthismanual

Overview

i hapterDUPLthis chapter 描述informationaboutmanualconventionsandDanoverviewoftheReaderPitsofeaturesandoperation?
i hapter\V\Pyetup\presents\information\about\unpacking\pcable\connection\information\and\setting\up\the\reader
i hapterDWPG onfiguration' singharcodes provides instructions and barcode labels for customizing your reader here are different sections for interface types general features data formatting symbols methodology specific and model specific features
i hapter[X] irelessl eaturesdescribesoptionsandprogrammingrelatedtoradio communicationfeaturesforthelx l variantsofthelmryphonfamily
i hapter!YPr aserO eaturesdescribesoptionsandprogrammingspecifictolaserOmodels
i hapter0 Pdx eferencesprovidesbackgroundinformationanddetailedinstructionsformorecomplexprogrammingitemsR
i hapter[ P0s essage] ormatting provides details for programming options
g ppendix ^g g Pz echnical?pecifications lists physical and performance characteristics as well as environmental and regulatory specifications not also provides standard cable pinouts and k j s heeper functions
gppendix\hPytandard\j efaults\references\common\factory\default\settings\for\reader\features\andOptions
g ppendixDi PbyampleHardi odesofferssamplebarcodesofseveralcommonsymbologies
g ppendixj 10q eypadincludesnumericbarcodestobeiscannedforcertainparametersettings
gppendixk?ycancodezableslistscontrolcharacteremulationinformationforedgeand'yhqeyboardinterfaces

Manual Conventions

z he following conventions are used in this document
z he'symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or procedures that must be observed when using the reader

Notes contain information necessary for properly diagnosing, repairing and operating the reader.

CAUTION

The CAUTION symbol advises you of actions that could damage equipment or property.

References

i urrent versions of this v roduct x eference muide Lx x mPw uick x eference muide Lw x mPthe j atalogic g laddin™ i onfiguration application and any other manuals instruction sheets and utilities for this product can be downloaded from the website listed below g Iternatively printed copies or product support i j s for most products can be purchased through yourj atalogic reseller

Technical Support

Datalogic Website Support

z hej atalogicwebsitewwwdatalogic.comdisthecompletesourcefortechnicalsupportandinformationforj atalogicproductsz heisiteoffersproductsupportwarrantyinformationproductmanualsproducttechnotessoftwareupdatesdemosandinstructionsforreturningproductsforrepair

Reseller Technical Support

g n'excellent source for technical assistance and information disan authorizedj atalogic reseller g reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses application software and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance

Telephone Technical Support

of you do not have internet or email access you may contact at a logic technical support LYXUOWX^Q V Word check the back cover of your manual for more contact information

About the Reader

Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communications settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configuration can be accomplished by scanning the programming barcodes within this guide.

Several models of the Gryphon are available, and are covered in this manual:

• Gryphon I GD4100 - Corded linear imager barcode reader
- Gryphon I GM4100 - Cordless linear imager barcode reader with Datalogic STAR™.
• Gryphon L GD4300 - Model with Laser scan engine.
• Gryphon I BT 4100 - Model with Bluetooth options.

Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application which is downloadable from the Datalogic website listed on the back cover of this manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device configuration using a PC. It communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can also create configuration barcodes to print.

Advancements in the LED technology used in the imager-based readers significantly improve the illumination of the target field of view, resulting in higher scan efficiency. Whether used in Single Trigger or Continuous Mode, the ergonomic design of the reader will help to promote comfortable handling during extended periods of use.

See "Interface Selection" on page 29 for a listing and descriptions of available interface sets by model type.

The BC40xx™ Radio Base

Base LEDs

LEDs on the Gryphon I Base provide information about the Base's status, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1. Gryphon I Base LEDs

YELLOW LED RED LED / GREEN LED BUTTON

z he following table describes the significance of each kj

	LED STATUS
	Power on / Data	Yellow On = Base is poweredYellow Blinking = Base receives data and commands from the Host or the Reader.
	Charging Red On = Battery charging is in progress.
	Charge completed Green On = the Battery is completely charged.
	Charging + Charge completed	Red and Green Blinking together = the Reader is not correctly placed onto the Base.

yee\haselytationondicationsLi ordlesss odelsBu t r -Donpage[WWW]formore-specificdetailslontheir kj sR

Base Button

z hehase!contains!button!which!isused!primarily!to!perform!a!paging!function!v:ressing!the!button!causes!a!sound!signal!to!be!emitted!by!all!scanners!linked!with!this!hase!has!long!as!the!scanner!is!awake!Lsee!vowerdown!z imeout!on?page!V !and!reception!is!enabled!Lsee!yleep!s odelz imeout!on?page!^X!Rz he!button!can!also!be!used!to!fforce!device!connection!Fvia!the!j atalogic!g laddinl?oftware!tool!available!for#free!download!from!the!j atalogic!website!Dyee!the!g laddinl? nline?n elp!for?details?

yee?haseytationondications?Li ordless's odels?u tr—Don?page?www?for?further?information?on?hase?huttonfunctions?

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection

z hehi XT” “ix adiohaseisavailablewithal’ “di counterfeitis oneyj etectortypicallyusedto verifytheauthenticityofbanknotesdu therfusesforcounterfeitdetectionarepassportticketcreditcardtravelers’checkandsimilarapplicationswhereitispossibletodetectfluorescentmarkswith’ “light
z hedetectorcontainsheightspecial" " Dr kj sPhasshownbelow"

UV LEDs

z heli ounterfeitj etectorisbasedon' "fluorescentemissionx eallbanknotesunderultravioletraysusuallyabsorbthe" "lightandwillshowspecialmarksmadewithfluorescentinksu ntheotherhandmostcounterfeitbanknotesonlyreflectthe" "lightswithoutshowingfluorescentmarks

To use:

UWw uicklypressthehasebuttontolighttheD' " Dr kj sR

VOn oldtheitemtobeverifiedundertherkj lightstoensurethatthespecialfluorescentmarksarevisible

Eco Power O2

WRlz heir kj slarelsettoswitchloffautomaticallyafterabout0minutes0z okeepthe1 "lr kj s0 inalwaysqonmodeQuicklypressthehasebuttonasecondtimewithinUTsecondsofthefirstpress0z oswitchthemoffsimplypressthebuttonagain0

An external power supply is necessary for full functionality of the Base station with UV Counterfeit Detector. Use only the recommended AC adapter 12Vdc.

Display

z he|mryphonms XUTT|is|available|with|an|optional|j isplay|z help isplay|features|X|lines|and|U |characters|and|offers|icons|and|three|additional|keys|to|allow|a|better|interaction|with|a|remote|host|00

l onts?contrast?backlightandother?parameters?can?be!configuredforthe?j isplay?yee?j isplay?leatures?onpage?V[X]andis essagell ormatting?onpage?WWW?formoreinformation?

Figure 2. Gryphon™ I Display

STAR-FIELD COVERAGE Yell G ENTER BATTERY CHARGE STATUS

Battery Safety

z o'reinstallchargeandsorperformanyotheractiononthebatteryfollowtheinstructionsinthismanual

Before installing the Battery, read "Battery Safety" on this and the following pages. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

WARNING

Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the scanner. When the battery is used in devices other than the designated product, it may damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an abnormal current to flow, it may cause the battery to become hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury.

Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury if exposed to abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings listed below:

• Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat.
• Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery pack to each other with any metal object (such as wire).
• Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects.
• Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks.
• Do not solder directly onto the battery pack.
• Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet.
• Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts.

WARNING

CAUTION

In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub the eye. Rinse well with water and immediately seek medical care. If left untreated, the battery fluid could cause damage to the eye.

• Always charge the battery at 32^ - 104^ (0^ - 40^) temperature range.
• Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can damage the device and void your warranty.
• Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devices, which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite.
• Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature locations.
• Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside cars in hot weather. Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy.
• Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on induction cookware.
• Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or shape, or appears abnormal in any other way.
• Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on.
• Do not remove or damage the battery pack's label.
• Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part.
• Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.

g s with other types of batteries in thium (oon Lr batteries will lose capacity over time apacity deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use or not not is difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a r battery but cell manufacturers rate them at YTT charge cycles on other words the batteries should be expected to take YTT full discharge charge cycles before needing replacement his number is higher if partial discharging recharging is adhered to rather than full deep discharging

Storage of batteries for long time at fully charged status or at fully discharged status should be avoided.

Only in case of long storage, to avoid deep discharge of the battery it is recommended to partially recharge the battery every three months to keep the charge status at a medium level.

As a reference, run a fast recharge for 20 minutes every three months on unused products to avoid any performance deterioration of the cell.

z helusefullifeofr o'batteriesdependsonusageandnumberofchargesPetcafterwhichthey shouldberemovedfromserviceespeciallyinmissioncriticalapplicationsj o'notcontinueto usea-batteryshowingexcessivelossofcapacityMitshouldbeproperlyrecycleddisposedofand replaced

i ollectandrecyclewastebatteriesseparatelyfromthedeviceincompliancewithkuropeanj irectiveVTT S Ski PIVTUUS YSk' PIVTTVS^ Ski DandVTUVSU^Sk' Dandsubsequentmodificationsyandi hinaregulatoryandotherslawsandregulationsabouttheenvironment

Programming the Reader

Configuration Methods

Programming Barcodes

z he reader is factory {configured with a standard set of default features g fter scanning the interface barcode you can select other options and customize your reader through use of the instructions and programming barcode labels available in the corresponding features section for your interface customizable settings for many features are found in Fi onfiguration' sing h arcodes starting on page W [

yomeprogramminglabelslikeFx estoreiustomj efaultsFonpageWXrequireonlytheScanofthesinglelabeltolenactthechangeos osthoweverrequirethereadertobeplacedinvrogrammingis odepriortoscanningthemycanlankt z kx Sk" oz barcodeoncetoentervrogrammingis odeu ncethereaderlisinvrogrammingis odePscanlanumberofparametersettingsbeforescanningthekt z kx Sk" oz barcodealsecondtimewhichwillthenacceptyourchangesExitvrogrammingis odeandreturnthereadertonormaloperation

There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence described above. Please read the description and setting instructions carefully when configuring each programmable feature.

Datalogic Aladdin™

j atalogicg laddin™is|a|multi|platform|utility|program|providing|a|quickland|user|friendly| configuration|method|via|the|x y|VVWS' yhQi u s |interface|g laddin|is|available|on|the|i j Q x u s |provided|with|your|product|and|also|from|the|j atalogic|website|g laddin|allows|you|to| program|the|reader|by|selecting|configuration|commands|through|a|user|friendly|graphical| interface|running|on|a|i |z hesel|commands|are|sent|to|the|reader|over|the|selected| communication|interface|or|they|can|be|printed|as|barcodes|to|be|scanned

g laddinalso provides the ability to perform a software upgrade for the connected device see the j atalogic g laddin™n elplu nqr inefor more details

Chapter 2 Setup

Unpacking

i heckcarefully to ensure the reader and any accessories ordered are present and undamaged of any damage occurred during shipment contactj atalogicz ethnically support nonformation is shown on page UTR

qkkvdzn kvgi qgmot mDyhouldtheuniteverrequireserviceMitshouldBereturnedinDits0originalshippingcontainer?

Setting Up the Reader

j ependingonwhetheryouareusingallordedor's obileversionoftheimryphonfollowthe stepsprovidedinthissectiontoconnectandgetyourreaderuplandcommunicatingwithitshost

UR begin by onstalling the interface able Li orded ordi onnecting the phaseytation Ls obile MD

VRdoToDonterfaceByelectionAndsettheDesiredDinterfaceR

WR i onfigure@interface&settings#only#if#not#using#factory#settings#forthat@interface#

XR modtoDi onfiguringDu therD eaturesDLifModificationsDareNeededfromFactorySettingsM

Installing the Interface Cable

I or! ordered versions?connect the reader cable by inserting the cable into the handle as shown in I figure 100z o remove it insert a paper clip into the release aperture then unplug the cable

Figure 3. Connect/disconnect the cable

Technical line drawing of a handheld device with two views showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

RS-232 Serial Connection

z urnoffpowertotheterminalSvi landconnectthereadertotheterminalSvi [serialportviathe] x y(VWV)cablelasshowninll igureXOftheterminalwillnotsupportby u z Lvoweru ffthe) z erminaltosupplyreaderpowerPluseltheapprovedpowersupplyLg i lg dapterRv lugthelg i g dapterbarrelconnectorintothesocketlontheix y(VWV)cableconnectorandthelg i lg dapter plugintoa1standardpoweroutlet

Figure 4. RS-232 Connection

Diagram showing medical device connection with labeled components including monitor, keyboard, and power outlet

Keyboard Wedge Connection

The Keyboard Wedge cable has a 'Y' connection from the reader. Connect the female to the male end from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port at the terminal/PC. Reference Figure 5.

Figure 5. Keyboard Wedge Interface connection

Diagram showing connections between a computer, a switch, and a medical device with labeled components

USB Connection

Connect the reader to a USB port on the terminal/PC using the correct USB cable for the interface type you ordered. Reference Figure 6.

Figure 6. USB connection

Diagram showing a medical device connected to a computer via cable, with a monitor and keyboard nearby.

Other connection types are described below and illustrated in Figure 7.

Figure 7. Other Interface Connections

graph TD
    A["User Device"] --> B["USB"]
    B --> C["Keyboard"]
    B --> D["MB"]
    B --> E["or..."]
    C --> F["USB Cable"]
    D --> G["USB Cable"]
    E --> H["USB Cable"]

Specific cables are required for connection to different hosts. The connectors illustrated above are examples only. Actual connectors may vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the reader remain the same.

RF Models

z hepowersupplyconnectsdirectlytothebaseNotonthecablejackforallconfigurations1 orallinterfacesExceptix y(VWVDa)powersupplyisrecommendedbutnotnecessarybecause thebasecanbepoweredfromthein osthenthebaseispoweredfromthein ostselectalslowchargeratek

Configuring the Base Station

z he base charger station may be configured in desk application to hold the reader in two different positions either a horizontal or standing position in order to provide the most comfortable use depending on needs

Black handheld scanner device with blue handle (no visible text or symbols)

Standing

Close-up of a black automotive headgear device with blue accent (no visible text or symbols)

Horizontal

Changing the Base Station Position

z he base station is configured by installing one of two sets of mechanical parts that come with the cordless kit z he default mounts shown below provide three options vertical wall mounting standing LXY or horizontal mounting with a higher mechanical retention of the scanner set the other mounts only for horizontal mounting with lower retention of the scanner z he different parts maybe interchanged to customize retention preferences

A tool such as a rigid pen or a flat screwdriver can be used to change the mounts. Do not allow it to touch the contacts.

UOnserttheappropriatepartsforthedesiredbasestationpositionhasshownbelow

ytanding n horizontal or" " ertical Horizontal Only

To ensure best contact and performance, do not intermix the parts of the two different mount sets.

VRD' sing your thumbs push open the plastic tabs on the bottom of the base to free the wing holders

Tab Tab

WHOz he?stand?can?now?be?repositioned?in?either?horizontal?or?standing?position?

Horizontal ytanding

Connecting the Base Station

I figure! !shows!how!to!connect!the!haselytation!to!terminal!vi !or!other!host!device!z urn!off! the!host!before!connection!andconsult!the!manual!forthat!equipment!Lif!necessary!before! proceeding!ni onnect!the!interface!cable!before!applying!power!to!the!haselytation!

The Gryphon GBT4100 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to the host. To connect to a system that uses a custom security PIN, follow the procedure in "i onnecting the hase when yecurity v in is k nabled F on page V For information on how to configure this feature, see hz yecurity s ode starting on page V T.

Base Station Connection and Routing: I ullyinsertthevoweri ableandinterfaceLoSI MDi able connectorsintotheirrespectiveportsintheundersideofthehaseytationLsee1 igureJ MRz hen0 connecttoanig i lg dapterPandplugtheg i powercordintotheLwallMoutletR

Gryphon Mobile can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.

For some specific interfaces or hosts or lengths of cable, the use of an external power supply may be recommended for full recharging capability (see "z echnical" ypecifications starting on page WV for more details).

Figure 8. Connecting the Base Station

I/F Cable AC/DC Adapter Wall plug Connector DC Power Cord Base Station

Securing the DC Power Cord (Optional)

The DC power cord for the adapter can be secured to the bottom of the base in order to maximize the mechanical retention of the cable itself. The routing of the power cord can be changed to accommodate the base station positioning: horizontal, stand or wall mounting. The cables can be looped around to the front of the Base Station, or fed directly out the back of the Base Station, as shown in Figure 9.

Figure 9. Options for routing the DC cord

Two views of a gray plastic device showing internal components with black wires and red arrows indicating connection points (no text or symbols)

Please refer to the arrows depicted on the bottom of the base when placing the cables, detailed in Figure 10.

Figure 10. Arrows showing routing

3D rendering of a gray plastic enclosure with internal cutouts and red directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Host Connection: "erifybeforeconnectionthatthereader'scabletypeiscompatiblewithyourhostequipmentostconnectionsplugdirectlyintothehostdevicelasshownbelowqeyboaredgeinterfacecableshavea'—'connectionwhereitsfemaleendmateswiththemaleendofthecablefromthekeyboardandtheremainingendlatthekeyboardportiontheterminalsvi"

Figure 11. Connecting to the Host

graph TD
    A["Base Station"] --> B["USB"]
    B --> C["USB Cable"]
    C --> D["USB Cable"]
    D --> E["Base Station"]
    F["Base Station"] --> G["USB Cable"]
    G --> H["USB Cable"]
    H --> I["USB Cable"]
    I --> J["USB Cable"]
    J --> K["USB Cable"]
    K --> L["USB Cable"]
    L --> M["USB Cable"]
    M --> N["USB Cable"]
    N --> O["USB Cable"]
    O --> P["USB Cable"]
    P --> Q["USB Cable"]
    Q --> R["USB Cable"]
    R --> S["USB Cable"]
    S --> T["USB Cable"]
    T --> U["USB Cable"]
    U --> V["USB Cable"]
    V --> W["USB Cable"]
    W --> X["USB Cable"]
    X --> Y["USB Cable"]
    Y --> Z["USB Cable"]

Power Connection : v lugtheig i lg dapterlintolanapprovedig i wallsocketwiththelcablef facingdownwardsLasshownlinl iguretopreventlunduestrainonthesocket

Gryphon Mobile can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.

Disconnecting the Cable:z odetachthe cableinsertal papercliporsimilarobjectintothe hole onthe basehas showninl igureUVR

Figure 12. Disconnecting the Cable

Insert Paper Clip

Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled

hen:connecting theh ase toa system that has la customly ecurity v in enabled follow the steps below in the order shown

U\Vower\down\the\host\system

VR i onnect the appropriate interface cable into the h ase as shown in figure UU on page VX30

WRDv lace the reader in the phase

XvowerdupthehostDz hereaderwilllinktothechasek

YR henthehostcompletelypowersupnewcustomysecurityviniodemaybeseenttothereaderandhasedependingonhostconfigurationiontactj atalogiciz echnicallyupportformoreinformationD

To change security settings or set up a PIN, see hz bysecuritys ode starting on page V T.

Linking the Reader to a Base Station

RF Devices

1 or|x 1 devices before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with the base z o link the handheld and the base press the trigger to wake it and place it on the base of the reader was previously linked to another base you must first scan the ' nlink action command before linking to the new base

Unlink

BT Models only

x emember'z hel'mandatory'conditionfor'establishing|a=newLinking|between|a|h z |handheld| and|a|h z |base|is{that|the|handheld|isunlinkedand|they|share|the|same|security|configuration|g |successfulLink|is{indicated|by|three|ascending|tones|from|the|reader|g |high|low|high|low|tone| indicates|the|link|attempt|was|unsuccessful|g |single|green|r kj |flash|after|this|tone|indicates|no| hasetytation|was|discovered|z wolgreen|r kj |flashes|after|this|tone|indicates{that|more|than|tone}| hasetytation|was|discovered|and|the|reader|did|notLink|z hree|r kj |flashes|after|this|tone| indicate|a|security|error}

Linking a BT Reader to a PC

z he reader can optionally be linked to a h bluetooth enabled vi with the serial port profile in either server mode or client mode for with human interface device profile Ln oj MR

Linking to a PC in Server Mode (BT Slave Mode)

z oOlinkaDhz DreaderinServerModelToDah BluetoothEnabledvi PFollowtheseSteps

UrDonstallanydriversprovidedwiththehluetoothadapterR

VBycanthe Link to a PC in Server Mode barcode to make the scanner visible to the host computer

Link to a PC in Server Mode

WR ' selthe#host#computer's#hluetooth#manager#to"j iscover#new#devices"and#select#Fj ataQ logic#canner#R#of#you#receive#an#error#message#itmay#be#necessary#toldisable#security#on# the#device#

XMyelect"connect"lontheVi tolinktheReadertotheVi R' selanx yQVWVterminalprogram toseeIncomingdataonthePortdesignatedbythecomputersh bluetoothmanager

Linking to a PC in Client Mode (BT Master Mode)

z he reader can optionally be linked in client mode to a h bluetooth enabled vi with the serial port profile and do this follow these steps'

UR knsurethevi forterminalcannetworkwithhluetoothdevicesandthatitispoweredon

V0knsurethatbali u s portdisassignedunderyerviceswithinthehluetoothsetupmenu

WRDi reatedaDr inklabelthatcontainstheaddressofthevi Dh bluetoothAdapterR

NOTE

The Bluetooth address can be found under "Properties" within in the Bluetooth setup menu.

z he>link|label|dis|adi ode|UV |function|W|label|with|the|following|format' [0] 000000000 LnkB<12 character bluetooth address>

XRDycantheDlinkDlabelDyouDcreatedDinDstepDWR

Linking to a PC in HID

UrdinstallanydriversprovidedwiththehluetoothadapterR

VR ycan[the]r ink,to[a]vi din]n oj barcodebelowto]make[the]scannervisibleto]thehost computer

Link to a PC in HID

WR 'settheGhostcomputer's\hluetooth|manager\toFj iscover\new\devicesFand\selectFj ataQlogicycannerFJof\you\receive\an\error\messagePit\may\be\necessary\to\disable\security\onthe\device

XR yelectFconnectFontheIvi tolinktheReadertotheIvi RD' sela text editing program to see incoming data from the reader

GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts

Stand Alone Layouts

Figure 13. Single Reader Layout

graph TD
    A["HOST"] --> B["Network"]
    B --> C["CRADLE"]
    C --> D["GRYPHON™ I"]

Figure 14. Multiple Reader Layout

Gryphon M4100 only (not valid for BT model) HOST GRYPHON™ I CRADLE

onstandalonesystemsPeachCradleIsconnectedtoalsingleIn ostR

Figure 15. Multiple Stand Alone Layouts

graph TD
    A["HOST"] --> B["GRYPHON™ I"]
    B --> C["CRADLE"]
    C --> D["GRYPHON™ I"]
    D --> E["CRADLE"]
    E --> F["GRYPHON™ I"]
    F --> G["CRADLE"]
    G --> H["GRYPHON™ I"]
    H --> I["CRADLE"]
    I --> J["GRYPHON™ I"]
    J --> K["CRADLE"]
    K --> L["GRYPHON™ I"]
    L --> M["CRADLE"]
    M --> N["GRYPHON™ I"]
    N --> O["CRADLE"]
    O --> P["GRYPHON™ I"]
    P --> Q["CRADLE"]
    Q --> R["GRYPHON™ I"]
    R --> S["CRADLE"]
    S --> T["GRYPHON™ I"]
    T --> U["CRADLE"]
    U --> V["GRYPHON™ I"]
    V --> W["CRADLE"]
    W --> X["GRYPHON™ I"]
    X --> Y["CRADLE"]
    Y --> Z["GRYPHON™ I"]
    Z --> AA["CRADLE"]
    AA --> AB["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AB --> AC["CRADLE"]
    AC --> AD["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AD --> AE["CRADLE"]
    AE --> AF["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AF --> AG["CRADLE"]
    AG --> AH["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AH --> AI["CRADLE"]
    AI --> AJ["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AJ --> AK["CRADLE"]
    AK --> AL["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AL --> AM["CRADLE"]
    AM --> AN["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AN --> AO["CRADLE"]
    AO --> AP["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AP --> AQ["CRADLE"]
    AQ --> AR["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AR --> AS["CRADLE"]
    AS --> AT["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AT --> AU["CRADLE"]
    AU --> AV["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AV --> AW["CRADLE"]
    AW --> AX["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AX --> AY["CRADLE"]
    AY --> AZ["GRYPHON™ I"]
    AZ --> BA["CRADLE"]
    BA --> BB["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BB --> BC["CRADLE"]
    BC --> BD["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BD --> BE["CRADLE"]
    BE --> BF["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BF --> BG["CRADLE"]
    BG --> BH["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BH --> BI["CRADLE"]
    BI --> BJ["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BJ --> BK["CRADLE"]
    BK --> BL["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BL --> BM["CRADLE"]
    BM --> BN["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BN --> BO["CRADLE"]
    BO --> BP["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BP --> BQ["CRADLE"]
    BQ --> BR["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BR --> BS["CRADLE"]
    BS --> BT["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BT --> BU["CRADLE"]
    BU --> BV["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BV --> BW["CRADLE"]
    BW --> BX["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BX --> BY["CRADLE"]
    BY --> BZ["GRYPHON™ I"]
    BZ --> CA["CRADLE"]
    CA --> CB["GRYPHON™ I"]
    CB --> CC["CRADLE"]
    CC --> CD["GRYPHON™ I"]
    CD --> CE["CRADLE"]
    CE --> CF["GRYPHON™ I"]
    CF --> CG["CRADLE"]
    CG --> CH["GRYPHON™ I"]
    CH --> CI["Gryphon M4100 only (not valid for BT model)"]

s anystandaloneconnectionscanoperateinthesamephysicalareawithoutinterferenceprovidedallreadersandcradlesinthesystemhavedifferentaddresses

Interface Selection

' ponCompleting the physical connection between the reader and its host proceed to z able JD starting on page W T to select the interface type the reader is connected to L for example 'lx y VWVPD q gy board edge P' yh Petc Y can the appropriate barcode in that section to configure your system's correct interface type D

kachreadermodelwillsupportoneofthefollowingsetsofhostinterfaces

General Purpose Models Retail Point of Sale Models

• RS-232

• RS-232

- RS-232 OPOS

- RS-232 OPOS

- USB

- USB

- Keyboard Wedge

- IBM 46XX

- Wand Emulation

Setting the Interface

ycan the programming barcode from this section which selects the appropriate interface type matching the system the reader will be connected to text proceed to the corresponding section in this manual also listed in z able U starting on page WTO to configure any desired settings and features associated with that interface

Unlike some programming features and options, interface selections require that you scan only one programming barcode label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT barcode prior to scanning an interface selection barcode.

Some interfaces require the scanner to start in the disabled state when powered up. If additional scanner configuration is desired while in this state, pull the trigger and hold it for five seconds. The scanner will change to a state that allows programming with barcodes.

Table 1. Available Interfaces

RS-232		FEATURES
RS-232 standard interface	Select RS232-STD	Set RS-232 Interface Features startinglon pageXU
Select RS232-WN	RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS	Select RS-232 OPOS
Select USB-COM-STD3	USB Com to simulate RS-232 standard interface
IBM		FEATURES
Select IBM-P5B	IBM-46xx Port 5B reader interface	Set IBM Interface Features startinglon page^
IBM-46xx Port 9B reader interface	Select IBM-P9B
USB-OEM		FEATURES
Select USB-OEM	USB-OEM(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS)	Set USB-OEM Interface Features startinglon page [

an DownloadTheCorrectUSBITComIdriverFromwwwIdatalogic.com

KEYBOARD		FEATURES
AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Standard Key Encoding	Select KBD-AT	Set KEYBOARDWEDGEInterfaceFeaturesstartinglonpageYY
Select KBD-AT-NK	Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard key encoding but without external keyboard
AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Alternate Key	Select KBD-AT-ALT
Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK	Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with alternate key encoding but without external keyboard
PC/XT w/Standard Key Encoding	Select KBD-XT
Select KBD-IBM-3153	Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminal 3153
KEYBOARD — cont.		FEATURES
Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make only keyboard	Select KBD-IBM-M	Set KEYBOARDWEDGEInterfaceFeaturesstarting(on)page)YY
Select KBD-IBM-MB	Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make break keyboard
Keyboard Wedge for DIGITAL Terminals VT2xx, VT3xx, VT4xx	Select KBD-DIG-VT
Select USB Keyboard	USB Keyboard with standard key encoding
USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding	Select USB Alternate Keyboard
Select USB-KBD-APPLE	USB Keyboard for Apple computers
WAND EMULATION FEATURES
Select WAND		Set WANDInterfaceFeaturesstarting(on)page)[W

Customizing Configuration Settings

Configure Interface Settings

of after scanning the interface barcode from the previous table your installation requires you to select options to further customize your reader turn to the appropriate section for your interface type in Fi onfiguration' sing harcodes starting on page [

• Fx yQVWVt u t r—DonterfaceFdonpageDXU
• Fx yQVWVS' yhQi omonterfacesFdonpageOX
• Fq eyboardinterfaceFlonpageYY
• F' yhQu ks DonterfaceFDonpage0 [
- Fohs IX " " DonterfaceFConDpageD ^
• F andk mulationDonterfaceFDonpageD[ W

Global Interface Features

yeeFmlobalinterface1eaturesFlonpageW^forsettingsconfigurablebyallDinterface1typesD

Configuring Other Features

of your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default settings the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface specific settings you might require

x eadingv arametersx eadingv arametersincludeprogrammingforscanningbeeperandrkj indicatorsandotheruniversallsettings

i ode|election| oncludes|options|concerning|the|barcode|label|types|Lsymbologies|Hz z hesed|settings|allow|you|to|enable|disable|symbologies|set|label|lengths|Require|check|digit|etck

irelessl eaturesi containsprogrammingoptionsforlx l andhh bluetoothmodelsonly

raserl eaturesj escribesoptionsandprogrammingspecifictolasermodels

Software Version Transmission

z helsoftware version of the device can be transmitted over the x yQVWV and q keyboard interfaces by scanning the following label

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Transmit Software Version

Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults

of you aren't sure what programming options are in your imager for you've changed some options and want to restore theiustomj efaulti onfiguration that may have been saved in the scanner scan thex estoreiustomj efaulti onfiguration barcode below z his will restore the custom configuration for the currently active interface

Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the imager for the correct interface before scanning this label.

Restore Custom Default Configuration

Restore Factory Configuration

ofyou want to restore thel actoryi onfiguration for your imager scan either thex estore' yg l actoryi onfiguration barcode or thex estorek ' ll actoryi onfiguration barcode below both labels restore the scanner configuration to the factory settings including the interface type he ' yg label restoresr abeloj s to those historically used in the' yg hek ' label restoresr abeloj s to those historically used in k uropez helr abeloj sets for' yg landk ' dare shown in the "r abeloj "section on page U of this manual

Restore USA Factory Configuration

Restore EU Factory Configuration

z he?programming?items listed in the following sections show the factory default settings for each of the menu commands

Replacing the Battery

Before replacing the Battery, read Fh artery/yafetyF1starting/on/pageUX Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

z ochangethebatteryofyourreadercompletethefollowinginstructions

URD ithdscrewdriverPunscrewthebatterycoverscrew

Close-up of a black rubber toilet with a red circular highlight on the lid (no text or symbols visible)

VR' nscrewandremovethethreescrewssecuringthebatteryholderandunplugthewhiteconnector

Screw Connector Screw Screw

WRG arefullyliftoutthegoldcontactscircuitandremovethebatteryholderwhilelettingthewhiteconnectorpassthroughtheholeinthebatteryholderLasshowninthepicturebelow

Pass-through hole

XRx emove the cold battery from its place Lif present and insert the new battery in the same position

Ydx eplace(thebatteryholderandthreescrewsplugintheconnectorandreturnthecontactscircuittoitspreviouslocation)

When inserting the new battery into the handle, take care to position the battery and the connector as shown.

Onsert|the|cover|in|the|handle|and|screw|it|back|into|place|

Black handheld barcode scanner with blue handle (no text or symbols visible)

h attery replacement Dis now complete

Chapter 3

Configuration Using Barcodes

z hisandfollowingsectionsprovideprogrammingbarcodestoconfigureyourreaderbychangingthedefaultsettingsordetailsaboutadditionalmethodsofprogrammingseeConfiguration Methods on page 16

You must first enable your reader to read barcodes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 17 and complete the appropriate procedure.

Configuration Parameters

u nce|the|reader|is|setup|you|can|change|the|default|parameters|to|meet|your|application|needs|x efer|to|"Standard Defaults" starting on page 335|for|initial|configuration|in|order|to|set|the|default|values|and|select|the|interface|for|your|application|

z he\following\configuration\parameters\are\applicable\tot\all\mryphon\models\covered\in\this\manual\unless\otherwise\indicated\hz he\items\are\divided\into\logical\groups\making\it\easy\tot\find\the\desired\function\based\on\its\reference\group

Interface Configuration:

• "RS-232 ONLY Interface" on page 41
• "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
• "Keyboard Interface" on page 55
• "USB-OEM Interface" on page 67
• "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 69
• "Wand Emulation Interface" on page 73

Parameters common to all interface applications:

• "Data Format" on page 77 gives options to control the messages sent to the in ost system
• "Reading Parameters" on page 91:control;various;operating;modes;and;indicators;status;functioning;

Symbology-specific parameters:

- "Code Selection" on page 107 provides configuration of personalized mix of codes code families and their options

Model-specific parameters:

• "Wireless Features" on page 257offersConfigurationofradiocontrolparametersforx1andhluetoothmodelsk
• "Laser Features" on page 287 provides options specific to laser models

Reading Configuration Barcodes

You must first enable your reader to read barcodes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 17 and complete the appropriate procedure.

z o program features

URdycantheikt z kx Sk" oz Jvx u mx g s s ot mbarcodeavailableatthetoplofeachproQ grammingpagewhenapplicable

VBy can the barcode to set the desired programming feature -ou may need to cover unused barcodes on the page and possibly the facing page to ensure that the reader reads only the barcode you intend to scan

WR of additional input parameters are needed to appendix D, Keypad and scan the approq priate characters from the keypad

Additional information about many features can be found in the "References" chapter.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

XR i ompletetheprogrammingsequencebyscanningthekt z kx Sk" oz bvx u mx gs Q s ot mbarcodetoexitvrogrammings odeR

1 or detailed descriptions programming information and examples for setting selected configuration items see References, starting on page 291

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

z helfollowinginterfacefeaturesareconfigurablebyallinterfacetypes

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore

z hisoptionspecifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands then set to ignore the reader will ignore all host commands except for those necessary for

• service mode
• flash programming mode
• keeping the interface active
• transmission of labels.

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Host Commands = Obey

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Host Commands = Ignore

USB Suspend Mode

z hissettingenablesdisablestheabilityof' yhinterfacestoentersuspendmodeR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

USB Suspend Mode = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

USB Suspend Mode = Enable

NOTES

RS-232 ONLY INTERFACE

BAUD RATE on page 42

DATA BITS on page 43

STOP BITS on page 43

PARITY on page 44

HANDSHAKING CONTROL on page 45

'setheprogrammingbarcodesinthissectionifmodificationstothestandardx yQVVInterfacesettingsarenecessarytomeetyoursystem'srequirementsggdditionalsettingswhichapplytoboththeIx yQVVand'yhinterfacesareavailableinthenextsection"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" starting on page 46

x eferenceAppendix B, Standard Defaultsforalistingofstandardfactorysettings

Baud Rate

yeepage 291 for information on this feature

	Baud Rate = 1200
Baud Rate = 2400
	Baud Rate = 4800
Baud Rate = 9600
	Baud Rate = 19,200
Baud Rate = 38,400
	Baud Rate = 57,600
Baud Rate = 115,200

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Data Bits

Data Bits

z hisparameterallowsthereadertointerfacewithdevicesrequiringa[Qbitor Qbitg yi ool protocolfor sending and receiving data]

	7 Data Bits
8 Data Bits

Stop Bits

yetthenumberofstopbitstomatchhostdevicerequirementsyeepage 291formoreinformationonthisfeature

	1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits

Parity

z his|feature|specifies|parity|required|for|sending|and|receiving|data|yelect|the|parity|type|according|to|host|device|requirements|yee|page 291|for|more|information

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Parity = Even

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Parity = None

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Parity = Odd

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Handshaking Control

Handshaking Control

yeepage 291formoreinformationaboutthisfeature

	Handshaking control, ITC
	H
	Han

RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 47

BEEP ON ASCII BEL on page 47

BEEP ON NOT ON FILE on page 48

ACK NAK OPTIONS on page 49

ACK CHARACTER on page 50

NAK CHARACTER on page 50

ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE on page 51

ACK NAK RETRY COUNT on page 51

ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING on page 52

INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE on page 52

DISABLE CHARACTER on page 53

ENABLE CHARACTER on page 53

z helprogramming|barcodes|in|this|chapter|allow|modifications|to|the|standard|x y(VWV|and)

'yhQi ominterfacesx eferenceAppendix B, Standard Defaultsfora listingofstandardfactorysettings

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Intercharacter Delay

Intercharacter Delay

z his|parameter|specifies|the|intercharacter|delay between|the|end|of|one|character|and|the|beginning|of|the|next|z he|delay|can|bel|set|within|a|range|of|zero|LT|to|^^Tmilliseconds|in|UTms|increments||g|setting|of|zero|specifies|no|delay|
yeepage 292formoreinformation

	Intercharacter Delay = No Delay
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.	CANCEL

DEFAULT

00 = No Intercharacter Delay

Beep On ASCII BEL

henthisparameterislenabled[the]readerissuesa]beepwhenabhkr dcharacterisdetectedontheix y(VWVseriallinebhhkr disissuedto|gain|a|useris|attentionto|an|illegal|entry|or|other|important|eventl

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom center.

Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable

Beep On Not on File

z hisoptionenablesdisablestheactionofthereadertosoundathreebeepsequenceuponreceivingaotqu nql ileLt u l hhostcommand

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.

Beep On Not On File = Disable

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central pattern

Beep On Not On File = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ACK NAK Options

ACK NAK Options

z his!enables!disables!the!ability!of!the!reader!to!support!the!x y!VVV!g i q St g q !protocol!yee!page 293!form!more!information!

	ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission
	ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command acknowledge
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

ACK Character

z his|setting|specifies|ang yi oo|character|or|hex|value|to|be|used|as|theg i q|character|g yi oo|characters|any|hex|value|from|T|to|Tx|l |can|be|selected|ye|page 293|for|more|information

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

Select ACK Character Setting

DEFAULT

0x06 'ACK' Character

NAK Character

z his|setting|specifies|ang yi oo|character|or|hex|value|to|be|used|as|thelt g q |character|g yi oo|characters|any|hex|value|from|To|Tx1 |can|be|selected|de|page 294|for|more|information

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

Select NAK Character Setting

DEFAULT

0x15 'NAK' Character

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ACK NAK Timeout Value

ACK NAK Timeout Value

z hisoptionspecifies the amount of time the reader waits for an g i q character from the host following label transmission z he selectable timeout Orange is VTT milliseconds to UYPITTms LUYD seconds in VTTms increments g selection of T disables the timeout

yeepage 295formoreinformationonsettingthisfeature

Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms

ACK NAK Retry Count

z his|feature|specifies|the|number|of|times|the|reader|retries|a|label|transmission|due|to|a|retry|condition Oz helselectable|range|is|from|U|to|VYX|retries|g|selection|of|T|disables|the|count|and|a|selection|of|VYY|specifies|unlimited|retries|yee|page 296|for|more|information|

Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

003 = 3 Retries

ACK NAK Error Handling

z his|feature|specifies|the|method|the|reader|uses|to|handle|receive|errors|detected|while|waiting|for|ang|i q|character|from|the|host|

	ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK Character
	ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid NAK Character

Indicate Transmission Failure

z hisoptionlenablesdisablesthereader'sabilitytosoundanerrorbeeptoindicatea transmissionfailurewhileingiqStgqmode

	Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication
Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication

Disable Character

ypecifies the value of the x y (VWV) host command used to disable the reader

gyi oo[characters]oranyhexvaluefromTTtoTx1 1 canbeselectedR

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

yeepage 297formoreinformationonsettingthisfeature

Select Disable Character Setting

DEFAULT

0x44 = Disable Character is 'D'

Enable Character

ypecifiesthevalueoftheIx y(VWV)hostcommandDusedToEnabletheReaderR

gyi oo|characters|or|any|hex|value|from|T|to|Tx|l |can|be|selectedR

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

yeepage 298in“x eferences”formoreinformationonsettingthisfeature

Select Enable Character Setting

DEFAULT

0x45 = Enable Character is 'E'

NOTES

KEYBOARD INTERFACE

COUNTRY MODE on page 56

CAPS LOCK STATE on page 59

NUMLOCK on page 60

SEND CONTROL CHARACTERS on page 61

WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL on page 62

INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 63

INTERCODE DELAY on page 64

USB KEYBOARD SPEED on page 65

USB KEYBOARD NUMERIC KEYPAD on page 66

'selthe|programming|barcodes|in|this|chapter|to|select|options|for|' yh|q eyboard|and| edge|interfaces|x eferenceAppendix B, Standard Defaults|for|allisting|of|standard|factory|settings|onformation|about|control|character|emulation|which|applies|to|keyboard|interfaces|is listed|in|Appendix E, Scancode Tables

Country Mode

z his|feature|specifies|the|country|slanguage|supported|by|the|keyboard|

u nlythefollowinginterfacessupportgrri countrys odes

• USB Keyboard (without alternate key encoding)
• AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Std Key Encoding
• Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard key encoding but without external key board
• AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 without Alternate Key
• Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 without alternate key encoding but without external keyboard
• Bluetooth HID Profile

g lllotherlinterfacessupportou tr -the followingi ountrys odes 'D' ryRPhelgiumRhritainP I rancePmermanyPotalyPypainMywedenR

Country Mode = U.S.

Country Mode = Belgium

Country Mode = Britain

Country Mode = Croatia

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Czech Republic

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Country Mode

Country Mode — continued

Country Mode = Denmark	Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
	Country Mode = France
Country Mode = French Canadian
	Country Mode = Germany
Country Mode = Hungary	Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
	Country Mode = Italy
Country Mode = Japanese 106-key	Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Lithuanian
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.	Country Mode = Norway
Country Mode = Poland	Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.	Country Mode = Portugal
Country Mode = Romania	Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.	Country Mode = Slovakia
Country Mode = Spain

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Caps Lock State

Country Mode — continued

	Country Mode = Sweden
Country Mode = Switzerland	Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Caps Lock State

z hisoptionspecifiestheformatinwhichthereader sendscharacterdataz hisappliestokeyboardwedgelinterfacesandhluetoothn oj tvrofilez hisdoesnotapplywhendanalternatelkeyencodingkeyboardisselected

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock ON
Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable

Numlock

z hisoptionspecifies the setting of the umbers rock umlock key while in keyboard wedge interface z hisonly applies to alternate key encoding interfaces not does not apply to yh keyboard

Numlock = Numlock key unchanged

Numlock = Numlock key toggled

Send Control Characters

z hisfeaturepecifieshowthereadertransmitsg yi oocontrolcharacterstothehostxEferenceAppendix E, Scancode Tablesformoreinformationaboutcontrolcharacters

u p tionsdaredasfollows'

Control Character 00 .i charactersfromTTTtoTxUI [aresent]ascontrolcharactertrloq eyspspecialkeyslarelocatedfromTx TtoTxg UR

Control Character 01 .i charactersfromDTToTxUI [aresentdas]controlcharacterri trlOi apitalD q ey?specialkeys[arelocated]fromTX TtoTxg UR

Control Character 02 . ypecialkeyslarelocatedfromTTtoTxUI landcharactersfromTx TtoTxl klareintendedlasanextendedg yi ooltableLs icrosoft indowsi odepageUVYVD—Isee!"Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252" on page 363MR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Wedge Send Control Characters = 01

Wedge Send Control Characters = 00

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Wedge Send Control Characters = 02

Wedge Quiet Interval

z his|option|specifies|the|amount|of|time|to|look|for|keyboard|activity|before|the|reader|breaks|the|keyboard|connection|in|order|to|transmit|data|to|host|z h|selectable|range|for|this|feature|is|from|T|to|^Tms|in|UTms|increments|

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

yeepage 299in“x eferences”for detailedinformationandexamplesforsettingthisfeature

Select Wedge Quiet Interval Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

10 = Quiet Interval of 100 ms

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Intercharacter Delay

Intercharacter Delay

z hisparameterspecifiestheintercharacterdelay betweentheendofonelcharacterandthelbeginningofthenextHz heldelaycanbelsetwithinarangeofzeroLTtoT^TmillisecondsinUTmsIncrementsgsettingofzerolspecifiesno delay

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface and Bluetooth HID Profile.

yeepage 300in“x eferences”fordetailedinformationandexamplesforsettingthisfeature

	Intercharacter Delay = No Delay
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.	CANCEL

DEFAULT

00 = No Intercharacter Delay

Intercode Delay

pecifics|the|delay|between|labels|transmitted|to|the|host|for|this|interface|z he|selectable|range| for|this|feature|is|from|T|to|^^seconds|

yeepage 301in“x eferences”for detailedinformationandexamplesforsettingthisfeature

Set Intercode Delay

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE USB Keyboard Speed

USB Keyboard Speed

z hisoptionspecifiesthe' yhpollrateforda' yhkeyboard

This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central 'S' character

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

USB Keyboard Speed = 1ms

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

USB Keyboard Speed = 3ms

USB Keyboard Speed = 4ms

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom left.

USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

USB Keyboard Speed — continued

	USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms
	USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad

z hisoptionontrolswhethernumericcharacterswillbesentusingstandardkeysorthenumerickeypad

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Standard Keys
Numeric Keypad

USB-OEM INTERFACE

USB-OEM DEVICE USAGE on page 68

INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 68

l eaturesettingsfor' yhinterfacesdifferdependinguponwhichhosttypethereaderwillbeconnectedwith' setthefeaturesettingsinthischapterandFohs IX " 'lonterfaceFonpage69to1specificallyconfigureforthe' yhqks interfaceu ther' yhinterfacesareincludedintheappropriatechapterfortheirhosttype

x eferenceAppendix B, Standard Defaultsforalistingofstandardfactorysettings

USB-OEM Device Usage

z he' yhqu ks protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different types of barcode scanners, j e pending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a 'yhqu ks tvu yyou may need to change this setting to enable all devices to communicate

u p tionsbare'

• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner

It may be necessary to switch device usage when connecting two readers/scanners of the same type to a POS system.

	USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner
USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner

Interface Options

z his ^D feature ^D provides ^D for ^D an ^D interface ^Q specific ^D control ^D mechanism ^R

	Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

IBM 46XX INTERFACE

46xx NUMBER OF HOST RESETS on page 70

TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT on page 72

INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 72

'setthebarcodesinthissectiontoconfigureprogrammablefeaturesforavailableDohsDX" D interfaces

x eferenceAppendix B, Standard Defaultsforlalistingofstandardfactorysettings

46xx Number of Host Resets

ypecifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the reader starts five second period to allow the user to enter programming is ode and configure the reader has configurable range for this feature is U to UY resets

	46xx Number of Host Resets = 1
46xx Number of Host Resets = 2
	46xx Number of Host Resets = 3
46xx Number of Host Resets = 4
	46xx Number of Host Resets = 5
46xx Number of Host Resets = 6
	46xx Number of Host Resets = 7

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 46xx Number of Host Resets

46xx Number of Host Resets — cont.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

46xx Number of Host Resets = 8

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

46xx Number of Host Resets = 9

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

46xx Number of Host Resets = 10

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' in the bottom right corner.

46xx Number of Host Resets = 11

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

46xx Number of Host Resets = 12

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' in the center.

46xx Number of Host Resets = 13

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

46xx Number of Host Resets = 14

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

46xx Number of Host Resets = 15

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format

z hisfeatureenabledisablestranslationdoi odeW^beforetransmittinglabeldatatoanohs Q X " "Doral' yhquks Dhostdu nlythe'symbologyidentifierismodifiedforthetranslationz he dataisnotconverteddoi odeW^dorverifiedtobevalidfordi odeW^R

u p tionsbare

IBM Standard Format. yendlabelsDinOstandardDohs DformatR

Code 39 Format. z translate the following symbols to di ode

• USB-OEM: Code128, Code 93, and Codabar
  • IBM-Port 5B: Code 128, Code 93, and Codabar
  • IBM-Port 9B: Code 93 and Codabar

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = IBM Standard Format

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Code 39 Format

Interface Options

z his|feature|provides|for|an|interface|specific|control|mechanismR

	Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

WAND EMULATION INTERFACE

WAND SIGNAL SPEED on page 74

WAND POLARITY on page 74

WAND IDLE STATE on page 75

TRANSMIT NOISE on page 75

LABEL SYMBOLOGY CONVERSION on page 76

z his chapter provides feature settings configuration for the and k mulation interface x eference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for listing of standard factory settings

Wand Signal Speed

z his|feature|specifies|the|speed|of|the| and|output|signal|per|nominal|bar|or|space|i hoices| are'

• 330 microseconds
- 660 microseconds

	Wand Signal Speed = 330ms
Wand Signal Speed = 660ms

Wand Polarity

z hisoptionspecifiesthepolarityofthe andoutputsignali hoicesare

• Quiet zones and spaces are high, bars are low
• Quiet zones and spaces are low, bars are high

TTL logic levels:

0V <= Low <= 0.7V

2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

	Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low
Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces Low, Bars High

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Wand Idle State

Wand Idle State

z his|feature|specifies|the|level|of|the| and|output|signal|when|the|reader|is|idle|

TTL logic levels:

0V <= Low <= 0.7V

2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

	Wand Idle State = Low
Wand Idle State = High

Transmit Noise

z hisoptionspecifiestheleadingStrailingnoiseforthe andinterface

	Transmit Noise = Disable
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading noise
	Transmit Noise = Transmit trailing noise
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading and trailing noise

Label Symbology Conversion

hen this feature is enabled for the and k mulation interface hall barcode labels are converted to a single symbol u p tions are

• No conversion
• Convert to Code 39 symbology
• Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII
• Convert to Code 128 symbology

Label Symbology Conversion = No conversion

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 128

DATA FORMAT

GLOBAL PREFIX/SUFFIX on page 78

GLOBAL AIM ID on page 79

GS1-128 AIM ID on page 80

LABEL ID starting on page 81Label ID: Pre-loaded SetsLabel ID: Set Individually Per SymbologyLabel ID ControlLabel ID Symbology SelectionSet Global Mid Label ID Characters

CASE CONVERSION on page 90

CHARACTER CONVERSION on page 90

CAUTION

It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.

lz heelfeaturesinthischaptercanbeusedtobuildspecificuserdefineddataintoamessagestringyeeel“x eferences”startingonpage 304formoredetailedinstructionsonsettingthesefeatures

Global Prefix/Suffix

z hisoptionsetsuptoVTcharacterseachfromthesetofgyi oo|characters|any|hex|value|fromTTto1l Oz he|charactersmay|added|as|prefix|Lina|position|before|the|barcode|data|also|called|header|andSor|as|suffix|Lina|position|following|the|barcode|data|also|called|footer|yee|page 305|for|more|detailed|instructions|on|setting|this|feature

z oconfigurethisfeaturepcanthek t z kx Sk" oz lvx u mx g s s ot mds u j k barcodeabove toplace theunitinvrogrammings odethenthe"yetmlobalvrefix"orl"yetmloballyuffix"? barcodefollowedby thedigits Linhexfromtheg lphanumericcharactersinAppendix D, Keypad representingyourdesiredcharacterlsloflessthantheexpectedstringofIVTcharacterslaere selectedpcanthek t z kx Sk" oz barcodetoterminatethestringkxitprogrammingmodeby scanningthek t z kx Sk" oz barcodeagain

Set Global Suffix

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

No Global Prefix

Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.

gos |label|identifiers|Las|opposed|to|custom|characters|you|select|yourself|as|with|label|identifiers|can|be|included|with|scanned|barcode|data|g os |label|identifiers|consist|of|three|characters|as|follows'

• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifierCharacterDisSymbolDependentMR)

SYMBOLOGY CHAR	SYMBOLOGY CHAR
UPC/EAN	E^a	Code 128/GS1-128 C
Code 39 and Code 32	A	DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded	e
Codabar F Standard 2 of 5 S
Interleaved 2 of 5 | ISBN			X^b
Code 93	G	Code 11	H

a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.

b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central bar

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Global AIM ID = Enable

GS1-128 AIM ID

ofmlobalg os Doj disdisabledthe g os Doj formyUQUV can be enabled disabled independently RD The AIM ID for GS1-128 is a ]C1, ]C2 or ]C3.

gos loj sforothersymbologiescanbeenableddisabledindependentlyaswelliontacti customeryupportforassistance

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

GS1-128 AIM ID = Enable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patterns

GS1-128 AIM ID = Disable

DEFAULT

Label ID

gbr abeldoj disla customizable code of up to three gy i oo characters Leach can be one of hex Tx TUQ Tx1 l mused to identify a barcode symbology type not can be appended previous to for following the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled z his feature provides options for configuring custom br abeldoj slas la pre loaded set Lsee "Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets" below or individually per symbology Lsee "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 81 R of you wish to program the reader total ways include lan industry standard label identifier for g r d symbology types see the previous feature "Global AIM ID" on page 79

yeeLabel ID, starting on page 307of“x eferences”formoreinformationonsettingthisfeature

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets

z he|reader|supports|two|pre|loaded|sets|of|r abelloj s|yee|Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets, starting on page 307|for|details|on|the|' yg|set|and|the|k' |set|

CAUTION

When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

DEFAULT

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU Set

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology

z hisfeature!configures!ar abelloj individually!for!single!symbolology!yee!Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology, starting on page 309!for!detailed!instructions!on!setting!this!feature!

Label ID Control

z hisoptioncontrolswhetherabeldoj isdisabledforsentlasalprefixorsuffixfora given symbologytype

	Label ID Transmission = Disable
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix
	Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix
CANCEL	Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label ID Symbology Selection

Label ID Symbology Selection

z hisoptionselects{theSYMBOLGYfor}which[a]r abelloj dis[tob]econfiguredyee"Label ID" on page 81[or]page309[in"x eferences"formofedetailedinstructions

	Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/P2 Label ID Character(s)
	Set UPC-A/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E/P2 Label ID Character(s)
	Set UPC-E/P5 Label ID Character(s)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Label ID Symbology Selection — continued

Set UPC-E/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/P2 Label ID Character(s)
	Set EAN 13/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8/P2 Label ID Character(s)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label ID Symbology Selection

Label ID Symbology Selection — continued

	Set EAN 8/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set GTIN Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN/P2 Label ID Character(s)
	Set GTIN/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Label ID Symbology Selection — continued

Set Code 32 Label ID Character(s)
	Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)
	Set Codablock F Label ID Character(s)
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
	Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label ID Symbology Selection

Label ID Symbology Selection — continued

Set Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Label ID Character(s)
	Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
	Set IATA Label ID Character(s)
Set Datalogic 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
	Set Codabar Label ID Character(s)
Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Label ID Symbology Selection — continued

Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s)
	Set DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s)
	Set DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s)
	Set MSI Label ID Character(s)
Set Plessey Label ID Character(s)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Set Global Mid Label ID Characters

Label ID Symbology Selection — continued

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s)

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Set Code 4 Label ID Character(s)

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Set Code 5 Label ID Character(s)

Set Global Mid Label ID Characters

ypeifiesmidlabelDoj {thatisaddedfortransmissionbetweenthelabelsofa}twolabelpairz oconfigurethisfeaturescantheikt z kx Sk" oz dvx umxgs s ot mls u j kbarcodeabovetoplacetheunitinvrogrammings odethenthe"yetmloballs idr abeldoj i characterlsk"”barcodefollowedbythedigitsLinhexfromtheglphanumericcharactersinAppendix D, KeypadrepresentingyourdesiredcharacterlskOflessthantheexpectedstringofVTcharactersareselectedscantheikt z kx Sk" oz barcodetoterminatethestringrkxitprogrammingmodelbyscanningtheikt z kx Sk" oz barcodeagain

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Set Global Mid Label ID Character(s)

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

No Mid Label ID Character (00)

Case Conversion

z his|feature|allows|conversion|of|the|case|of|all|alphabetic|characters|to|upper|or|lower|case|

Case conversion affects ONLY scanned barcode data, and does not affect Label ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.

DEFAULT

Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)

Case Conversion = Convert to upper case

Case Conversion = Convert to lower case

Character Conversion

i characterconversiondislaneightbyteconfigurationitemz he eightbytesareXcharacterpairs representedinhexadecimalgyi oolvaluesz he firstcharacterinthepairisthecharacterthatwill be convertedz he secondcharacterinthepairisthecharactertoconverttoofthecharactertoconvertinaipairisil I thennoIconversionisdone

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

Configure Character Conversion

DEFAULT

0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF (No character conversion)

READING PARAMETERS

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT on page 92	GOOD READ LED DURATION on page 100
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT on page 93	SCAN MODE on page 101
SLEEP MODE TIMEOUT on page 94	STAND MODE TRIGGERED TIMEOUT on page 102
POWER ON ALERT on page 96	STAND DETECTION on page 103
GOOD READ: WHEN TO INDICATE on page 96	STAND MODE SENSITIVITY on page 104
GOOD READ BEEP TYPE on page 97	SCANNING ACTIVE TIME on page 104
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY on page 97	FLASH ON TIME on page 105
GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH on page 98	FLASH OFF TIME on page 105
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME on page 99	GREEN SPOT DURATION on page 106

Double Read Timeout

j ouble|x ead|z imeout|prevents|double|read|of|the|same|label|by|setting|the|minimum|time|allowed|between|reads|of|labels|of|the|same|symbolology|and|data|of|the|unit|reads|a|label|and|sees|the|same|label|again|within|the|specified|timeout|the|second|read|is|ignored|j ouble|x ead|z imeout|does|not|apply|to|scan|modes|that|require|a|trigger|pull|for|each|label|read

	Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second
	Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second
	Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second
	Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label Gone Timeout

Double Read Timeout — continued

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Double Read Timeout = 0.8 Second

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Double Read Timeout = 0.9 Second

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central 'B' mark

Double Read Timeout = 1 Second

Label Gone Timeout

z hisfeaturesetsthe timefarthelastlabelsegmentisseenbeforethereaderpreparesforanewlabelhz heltimeoutcanbsetwithinarangeofUTmillisecondstoVPYYTmillisecondslVRY0secondsinUTmsincrementsbr abelmonelz imeoutdoesnotapplytoscanmodesthatrequirealtriggerpullforeachlabelthatisreadyeepage 312in“x eferences”fordetailedinstructionslandexamplesforsettingthisfeature

Select Label Gone Timeout Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

016 = Timeout of 160 ms

Sleep Mode Timeout

z his|feature|sets|the|amount|of|time|that|the|reader|will|be|idle|before|it|enters|int|o|allow|power|yleeps|ode|hen|in|yleeps|ode|the|reader|can|no|longer|receive|commands|from|the|n ost|or|baselstation|until|it|is|woken|up|again|by|al|trigger|pull|or|being|placed|int|ola|baselstation|

onorderforthereadertoenterlyleeps odethefollowingconditionsmustbelmet

Corded version (GD4100 only).x yQVWVinterfaceandtriggersingleTriggermultipleOrTriggerpulseR

Mobile version (GM4100 only). Byleep state is allowed only on the handheld not on the base when trigger single trigger multiple or trigger pulse are set and when the reader is not charging the battery

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon Laser or Gryphon BT models

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Sleep Mode Timeout = Disable

DEFAULT

Sleep Mode Timeout = 1 Second

Sleep Mode Timeout = 2 Seconds

Sleep Mode Timeout = 3 Seconds

Sleep Mode Timeout = 4 Seconds

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Sleep Mode Timeout

Sleep Mode Timeout — continued

	Sleep Mode Timeout = 5 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 6 Seconds
	Sleep Mode Timeout = 7 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 8 Seconds
	Sleep Mode Timeout = 9 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 10 Seconds

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS

Power On Alert

j isablesforenablestheindicationfromtheheeperthatthereaderisreceivingpower

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots

Power On Alert = Four Beeps

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)

Good Read: When to Indicate

z hisfeaturespecifieswhenthereaderwillprovideindicationLbeepandSorflashitsgreenrkjuponsuccessfullyreadinga_barcode

This option, which uses CTS, is only valid for RS-232 interfaces. This item is not configurable for the GM4100/GBT 4100 models.

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical bar

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Indicate Good Read = After Transmit

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical bar

Indicate Good Read = After CTS Goes Inactive, Then Active

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Good Read Beep Type

Good Read Beep Type

ypecifies whether the good read beep has a monolor bitonal beep sounds

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Good Read Beep Type = Mono
Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal

Good Read Beep Frequency

g adjusts the good read beep to sound data selectable flow medium or high frequency selectable from the list below Li controls the beeper's pitch stone

	Good Read Beep Frequency = Low
Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium
	Good Read Beep Frequency = High

LED and Beeper Indicators ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Good Read Beep Length

	Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec
	Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec
	Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec
	Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Good Read Beep Volume

Good Read Beep Volume

yelects|the|beeper|volume|Cloudness|upon|a|good|read|beep|z here|are|three|selectable|volume| levels|

	Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off
Good Read Beep Volume = Low
	Good Read Beep Volume = Medium
Good Read Beep Volume = High

Good Read LED Duration

z his|feature|specifies|the|amount|of|time|that|the|mood|x ead|r kj |remains|on|following|a|good|read|z hed|good|read|r kj |on|time|can|bel|set|within|a|range|of|UT|milliseconds|to|VPYYT|milliseconds|LTXTTU|to|VYYY|seconds|Din|UTTms|increments|

yeepage 313in“x eferences”for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Select Good Read LED Duration Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

003 = Good Read LED stays on for 300 ms

Indicators are dimmed during sleep.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Scan Mode

SCANNING FEATURES

Scan Mode

yelects|the|reader's|scan|operating|mode|yee|page 314|in|“x eferences”|for|descriptions|

Scan Mode = Trigger Single
	Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple
Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple
	Scan Mode = Flashinga
Scan Mode = Always Onb
	Scan Mode = Stand Modec
Scan Mode = Trigger Object Sense c

a. Recommended scan mode for Gryphon L for hands-free stand mode operation.
b. See "Laser Features" starting on page 287 for additional laser programmable timeout options.
c. Not applicable to the Gryphon L.

Stand Mode Triggered Timeout

z hisfeaturespecifiesthe timeto remaininTrigger SinglemodeafterthetriggerispulledwhileinStand Mode

This timeout is only used when the Scan Mode is configured as Stand Mode.

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L model.

Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 0.5 Seconds
	Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 1.5 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 2 Seconds
	Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 3 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 4 Seconds
	Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 6 Seconds

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Stand Detection

Stand Mode Triggered Timeout — continued

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 8 Seconds

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = Switch back to Trigger Single on trigger pull

Stand Detection

ypecifies the behavior of the scanner when placed in a stand that contains autorecognition hardware

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L.

Switch to Stand Mode

Ignore Autorecognition

Switch to Flashing
Switch to Always On

Stand Mode Sensitivity

yets the sensitivity level for stand mode wakeup hoices are low medium and high

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L.

Scanning Active Time

z his|setting|specifies|the|amount|of|time|that|the|reader|stays|in|scan|u |t |state|once|the|state|is| entered|z he|range|for|this|setting|is|from|U|to|VYY|seconds|in|U|second|increments|Myee| page 315|in“x eferences”|for|descriptions|of|each|feature

Select Scanning Active Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.	CANCEL

DEFAULT

005 = Scanning is active for 5 Seconds

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Flash On Time

Flash On Time

z hisfeaturespecifiestheu t timefortheindicatorrkj whileinllashls ode#z he#selectablerangeisUTTto^P^TTmillisecondslTRUto^R^secondsMPOinUTTmillisecondincrementslyeepage 316in“x eferences”fordetailedinformationonsettingthisfeature

Select Flash ON Time Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second

Flash Off Time

z hisfeaturespecifiesthe11timefortheindicatorrkjwhileinllashs odeoz helsealablerangeisUTTtoPATTmillisecondSLTRUtoR^secondsMPinUTTmillisecondIncrementsDyeedpage 317in“x eferences”fordetailedinformationonsettingthisfeature

Select Flash OFF Time Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms

Green Spot Duration

ypecifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read

	Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off)
Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)
	Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)
Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)

CODE SELECTION

z he reader supports the following symbologies barcode types yymbology dependent options for each symbology are included in this chapter

CODE EAN/UPC on page 109	STANDARD 2 OF 5 on page 178
• Coupon Control	INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 on page 184
• UPC-A • Code IATA
• UPC-E	DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 on page 191
• EAN 13 (Jan 13)	CODABAR on page 197
• ISSN • ABC Codabar
• EAN 8 (Jan 8)	CODE 11 on page 212
• UPC/EAN Global Settings	GS1 DATABARTM OMNIDIRECTIONAL on page 221
CODE 39 on page 136	• GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional
• Code 32 (ITAL Pharmaceutical Code)	• GS1 DataBarTM Expanded
• Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical)	• GS1 DataBarTM Limited
CODE 128 on page 151	CODE 93 on page 229
• GS1-128	MSI on page 237
CODE ISBT 128 on page 162	PLESSEY on page 243
CODABLOCK F on page 165	CODE 4 on page 251
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) on page 169	CODE 5 on page 252
• Follett 2 of 5
• Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR

j efaultsettings|are|indicated|at|each|feature|soption|with|a|green|arrow|g |so|reference| Appendix B, Standard Defaults|for|all|listing|of|the|most|widely|used|set|of|standard|factory| settings|z hat|section|also|provides|space|to|record|any|custom|settings|needed|or|implemented| for|your|system

z o|set|most|features

URDycandthekt z kx Sk" oz lvx u mx gs s ot mbarcodeatthetopofa plicableprogramQ mingpagesR

V!ycan the correct barcode to set the desired programming feature or parameter (ou may need to cover unused barcodes on the page and possibly the facing page to ensure that the reader reads only the barcode you intend to scan

WR of additional input parameters are needed to appendix D, Keypad and scan the appro private characters from the keypad

Additional information about many features can be found in the "References" chapter.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

XR i opletetheprogrammingsequencebyscanningthekt z kx Sk" oz dvy u mx gs Q s ot mbarcodetoexitvrogrammings odeR

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES

'se{this}feature}to{disable}all{symbologies}

Urdycanthe0kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot m0barcodebelow

VNDycantheOj isablegllDyymbologiesDbarcodeR

WRDi opletetheprogrammingsequenceb ylscanningthekt z kx Sk" oz lvx u mx gs Q s ot mbarcode

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Disable All Symbologies

This does not disable the reading of programming labels.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Coupon Control

CODE EAN/UPC

Coupon Control

z his feature is used to control the reader's method of processing coupon labels

	Coupon Control = Allow all coupon barcodes to be decoded
Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding
	Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBarTMcoupon decoding

UPC-A

z he following options apply to the vi Qg Symbolology

UPC-A Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotread' vi Qg DbarcodesR

	UPC-A = Disable
UPC-A = Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with vi Qg barcode data

	UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

kxpands' vi Qg data to the kg t QUW data format by electing this feature also changes the symbology of Dto match those required for kg t QUWR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Don't Expand

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission

z his feature enables S disables transmission of the' vi Qg number system character

	UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit
UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit

UPC-A Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|' vi |g|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|a|good|read|

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patterns

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

UPC-A Minimum Reads = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE UPC-E Enable/Disable

UPC-E

z he following options apply to the' vi Qk symbolology

UPC-E Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotread' vi QkbarcodesR

	UPC-E = Disable
UPC-E = Enable

UPC-E Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with vi k barcode data

	UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

kxpands' vi Qkdatatothekg t QUWdataformatryelectingthisfeaturealsochangesthe symbologyloj tomatchthoserequiredforkg t QUWR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical bar

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand
UPC-E to EAN-13 = Don't Expand

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

kxpands' vi Qkdatatothe' vi Qgdataformat

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

UPC-E to UPC-A = Don't Expand

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

UPC-E to UPC-A = Expand

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

z hisfeatureenablesdisablestransmissionofthe' vi Qklsystemnumbercharacter

	UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit
UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit

UPC-E Minimum Reads

pecifics the minimum number of consecutive times a' vi Qk label must be decoded before it is accepted as bad good read

	UPC-E Minimum Reads = 1
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 2
	UPC-E Minimum Reads = 3
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 4

GTIN FORMATTING

z his\feature\enables\disables\the\ability\to\convert' vi QkPD' vi Qg PDkg t D PandDkg t DUWDlabels\into\the\mz ot DUXQcharacter\format

If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN label.

DEFAULT

GTIN Formatting = Disable

GTIN Formatting = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE EAN 13 Enable/Disable

EAN 13 (JAN 13)

z he following options apply to the kg t DUWDLpanDUWMDSymbology

EAN 13 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadkg t DUWSpg t DUWDBarcodesR

	EAN 13 = Disable
EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with kg t UWD barcode data

	EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
[235KEAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character

knablesdisablestransmissionofankg t Spg t UWD1 lagUDcharacterdz heD1 lagUDcharacteristhe0 first character of the label

	EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion

z hisoptionlenablesdisablesconversionofkg t DUWSpg t IUWWooklandlabelsstartingwith^[ toboyht Labels]

	EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE EAN 13 Minimum Reads

EAN 13 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|and|k g t |UW|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 1

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 4

ISSN

z he following options apply to the oyyt Osymbology

ISSN Enable/Disable

knablesSdisablesDconversionDofDkgt Spgt UWDhooklandDlabelsDstartingDwith^[ DtoDoyyt DlabelsR

ISSN = Enable

ISSN = Disable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE EAN 8 Enable/Disable

EAN 8 (JAN 8)

z heDfollowingOptionsApplyTotheKg t D DLpanD MDsymbologyR

EAN 8 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadkg t D Spg t D BarcodesR

	EAN 8 = Disable
EAN 8 = Enable

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with kgt D barcode data

	EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13

knable this option to expand kg t D Spg t D labels to kg t DUWSpg t DUWR

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Disable

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 8 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|an|kg t | |Lpan| |label|must| be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 1

EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 2

EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 3

EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 4

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS

z hissectionprovidesconfigurationsettingsfor' vi QgPD' vi QkP0kgt DUWDandDkgt D D symbologiesDandaffectsallDoftheseunlessotherwisemarkedforeachfeaturedescriptionR

UPC/EAN Decoding Level

j encoding r evels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs

yeepage 302 for more information on this feature

UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
	UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 2
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 3
	UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 4
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

UPC/EAN Correlation

hencorrelationisenabledthereaderwillcombinelabeldatafrommultiplescanswhendecodingz hiswillhelpthescannerreadlabelsthathavespotsvoidsandordamagedareasknablingcorrelationwillalsoincreasethechancesthatlabelwillbereadincorrectly

UPC/EAN Correlation = Disable

UPC/EAN Correlation = Enable

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check

z his ^0 feature ^1 enables ^0 disables ^0 calculation ^0 and ^0 verification ^0 of ^0 price ^0 weight ^0 check ^0 digits ^0

Price Weight Check = Disabled

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.

Price Weight Check = 4-digit price-weight check

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Price Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight check

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight check

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.

Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight check

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE In-Store Minimum Reads

In-Store Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|an|in|store|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|
onstorelabelsaredefinedas' vi Qg labelswithanumbersystemcharacterofVdorXdaswelllaskg t Dandk g t DUWlabelswitha1 lagUcharacterofVdorAnk g t UWlabelstartingwiththethreecharacters^ TX

	In-Store Minimum Reads = 1
In-Store Minimum Reads = 2
	In-Store Minimum Reads = 3
In-Store Minimum Reads = 4

ADD-ONS

i ontact:i customer@upportforadvancedprogrammingofoptionalandconditionaladdqons

Optional Add-ons

z he?reader?can?be?enabled?to?optionally?read?the?following?add?ons?Lsupplementals?

If a UPC/EAN base label and an add-on are both decoded, the reader will transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is decoded without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an add-on. Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader before optional add-on settings.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Optional Add-On Timer

Optional Add-On Timer

z hisoptionsetsthetimethereaderwilllookforlanaddonwhenlanaddonfragmenthasbeenseenandoptionaladdonsareenabledlgIsoiseel"Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer" on page 130

Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms

Add-Ons ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional Add-On Timer — cont.

	Optional Add-on Timer = 60ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Optional Add-On Timer

Optional Add-On Timer — cont.

	Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 200ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 240ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 280ms
	Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer

z his option sets the timer expiration value to read the added part after reading the linear kg t S ' vi part or' vi Skg t daddons other than those of that type see "Optional Add-On Timer" on page 127R

	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.

	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms

Add-Ons ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.

	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms
	Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads

P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads

z his feature specifies the minimum number of times a v V add on must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label

	P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
	P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4

P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|times|a|v |add|on|must|be|read|before|it|is|marked|as|valid|and|then|combined|with|a|base|label

	P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
	P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads

GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|times|an|myUUV |add|on|must|be|read|before|it|is|marked|as|valid|and|then|combined|with|a|basellabel

[G TXY]	GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
	GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4

CODE 39

z he following options apply to the i ode W^Isymbology

Code 39 Enable/Disable

	Code 39 = Disable
Code 39 = Enable

Code 39 Check Character Calculation

knable this option to enables disables calculation and verification of an optional di odeW^check character hen disabled any check character in the label dis treated as data character

	Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check
	Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 7 Check

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Check Character Transmission

Code 39 Check Character Calculation — cont.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Italian Post Check

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Daimler Chrysler Check

Code 39 Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with i odeW^ barcode data

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Send

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

DEFAULT

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission

knable this option to enable disable transmission of i ode w^ start and stop characters

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don't Transmit

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Code 39 Full ASCII

knables\disables\the\translation\of\i ode\W^\characters\to\i ode\W^\full\g yi oo\characters\

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the top

Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Quiet Zones

Code 39 Quiet Zones

z hisfeature specifies the number of quiet zones for i odeW^labels w uiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a barcode typically U1 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
	Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Auto
	Code 39 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Code 39 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|ode|W^|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Code 39 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 2
	Code 39 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Decoding Level

Code 39 Decoding Level

j encodingr evels|are|used|to|configure|a|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|be|very|aggressive|to|very|conservative|depending|on|a|particular|customer's|needs|yee|page 302|for|more|information|on|this|feature|

This configuration item applies to Code 39 and Code 32.

Code 39 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
	Code 39 Decoding Level = 2
Code 39 Decoding Level = 3
	Code 39 Decoding Level = 4
Code 39 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

Code 39 Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|ode|W^| symbology|

Variable Length.l or variableLengthdecoding minimumand maximumlengthmay set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 39 Set Length 1

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 39 Length Control or length U is the minimum label length if in Variable Lengths ode for the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
s odeOrengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonlyOz he&lengthCanBebsetfromYTtoYTD charactersR
z able2 provides examples for setting for length URyee page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 2. Code 39 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

02 = Length 1 is 2 Characters

Code 39 Set Length 2

z hisfeaturespecifiesoneofthebarcodelengthsforCode 39 Length ControlrengthVisthe maximumlabellengthifinVariable LengthsodeforthesecondfixedlengthifinFixed Length
s odeDr engthincludesthebarcode'scheckdataandfullQgyi oolshiftcharactershz hdlengthd doesnotincludestartStopcharactersR
z able30 provides examples for setting Dr ength NV yee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 3. Code 39 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters	Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Code 39Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Interdigit Ratio

Code 39 Interdigit Ratio

z his|feature|specifies|the|ratio|between|an|intercharacter|space|and|module|for|i ode|W^|labels|

	Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 1
	Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 2
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 3
	Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 4
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 5

Code 39 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio — cont.

	Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 6
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 7
	Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 8
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 9
	Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 10

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Character Correlation

Code 39 Character Correlation

hencorrelationisenabledthebarcodereaderwillcombinelabeldatafrommultiplescanswhendecodingknablingcorrelationwillhelpthescannerreadlabelsthathavesomespotsandorvoidsotmayalsohelpreadlabelsthathavedamagedareasknablingcorrelationwillalsoincreasethechancesthatallabelwillbereadincorrectly

DEFAULT

Code 39 Character Correlation = Disable

Code 39 Character Correlation = Enable

Code 39 Stitching

z hisoptionlenablesdisablesstitchingfori odeW^labelshenpartsofdi odeW^barcodearepresentedtothereaderwiththisfeatureenabledthebarcodepartswillbeassembledbythereader'ssoftwareandthedatawillbe decodedifallbarcodeproofingrequirementsaremet

	Code 39 Stitching = Disable
Code 39 Stitching = Enable

CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE)

z he following options apply to the di ode WV Lotalian v pharmaceutical di ode M symbology R

Code 32 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadiodeWVbarcodesR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Code 32 = Enable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Code 32 = Disable

Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions

The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39 settings:

"Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 139

"Code 39 Minimum Reads" on page 140

"Code 39 Decoding Level" on page 141

"Code 39 Interdigit Ratio" on page 145

"Code 39 Character Correlation" on page 147

"Code 39 Stitching" on page 147

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 32 Check Char Transmission

Code 32 Check Char Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with i ode DWW barcode data

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission

z hisoptionenablesdisablestransmissionofiodeWVstartandstopcharacters

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don't Transmit

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL)

z he following options apply to the i odeW^Di ov Symbology

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesabilityofthereadertodecodeDi odeW^Di ovLabelsR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Barcode image containing encoded digital information

Code 39 CIP = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Enable/Disable

CODE 128

z he following options apply to the i ode UV symbology

Code 128 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadi odeUV DbarcodesR

	Code 128 = Disable
Code 128 = Enable

Expand Code 128 to Code 39

z hisfeatureenablesdisablesexpansionofiodeUV labelstoiodeW^labelsR

	Code 128 to Code 39 = Don't Expand
Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand

Code 128 Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with i odeUV barcode data

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

Code 128 Function Character Transmission

knablesSdisablesTransmissionDofi odeUV DfunctionCharactersDUPDVPOWP0andDXR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small white dot at the bottom center.

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Send

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Don't Send

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission

Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission

knablesDisablestheTransmissionof"yubQiodeexchange"charactersLt u z transmittedby standarddecoding

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission = Enable

Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission = Disable

Code 128 Quiet Zones

z his|feature|specifies|the|number|of|quiet|zones|for|i ode|UV |labels|w uiet|zones|are|blank|areas| at|the|ends|of|a|barcode|and|are|typically|U1|times|the|width|of|the|narrowest|bar|or|space|in|the|label|

	Code 128 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
	Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Auto
	Code 128 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Minimum Reads

Code 128 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|i ode|UV |label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central pattern

Code 128 Minimum Reads = 1

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the bars

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 128 Minimum Reads = 4

Code 128 Decoding Level

j encodingr evels|are|used|to|configure|a|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|belvery|aggressive|to|very|conservative|depending|on|a|particular|customer's|needs|yee|page 302|for|more|information|on|this|feature

Code 128 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
	Code 128 Decoding Level = 2
Code 128 Decoding Level = 3
	Code 128 Decoding Level = 4
Code 128 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Length Control

Code 128 Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|ode|UV | symbology|yee|page 302|for|more|information

DEFAULT

Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 128 Set Length 1

ypeifiesoneofthebarcodelengthsforCode 128 Length ControlrengthUistheminimumlabellengthifinVariable Lengths odeorthefirstfixedlengthifinFixed Lengths odeorengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonlyz helengthcanbelsetfromUtoTcharactersD

z able4 provides some examples for setting for length your page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature?

Table 4. Code 128 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	01 Character	07 Characters	15 Characters	80 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘8’	AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Code 128 Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 128 Length Controlr length is the maximum label length if in Variable Lengths ode for the second fixed length if in Fixed Lengths ode r ength includes the barcode's data characters only
z he\length\can\be\set\from\UD\to T\characters\g\setting\of\TT\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\Only\one\fixed\length\AR
z able[5] provides examples for setting for length/Myepage 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 5. Code 128 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 80 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	'0' and '0' '0' and '7' '0' and 'F' '5' AND 0'
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

R

Select Code 128 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

80 = Length 2 is 80 Characters

Code 128 Character Correlation

hen correlation is enabled the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding knabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and or voids hot may also help read labels that have damaged areas knabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Code 128 Character Correlation = Enable

Code 128 Character Correlation = Disable

Code 128 Stitching

z hisoptionenablesdisablesstitchingfori odeUV labelshenpartsoflaiodeUV barcodearepresentedtothereaderwiththisfeatureenabledthebarcodepartswillbeassembledbythereader'ssoftwareandthedatawillbe decodedifallbarcodeproofingrequirementsaremet

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Code 128 Stitching = Disable

Code 128 Stitching = Enable

GS1-128

z he following options apply to the my UQUV symbolology lg lso known as ' yyQUV PmyUQUV Pm z ot QUV P' i i QUV Pkg t QUV RM

GS1-128 Enable

z hisoption enables disables the ability of the reader to translate my UQUV labels to the my UQUV data format uptions are

• Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format.
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format.
• Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.

	GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format
GS1-128 = Transmit in GS1-128 data format
	GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels

CODE ISBT 128

z he following options apply to the boy h z DUV Symbolology

ISBT 128 Concatenation

'seltthisOptionToEnableSdisableBoyhz UV DconcatenationOfV0labelsR

DEFAULT

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Disable

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Enable

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation

henEnabledPDthisDfeatureDforcesDconcatenationDforDoyhz R

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled.

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode

ypecifies the concatenation model between dyatic and dynamic

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled (see page 162).

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

ypecifiesthetimeoutusedbytheoyhz UV Dj namicdi oncatenationds oder

	ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec
	ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec
	ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options

To set up pairs of label types for concatenation, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or contact Datalogic Technical Support, as described on page 10.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codablock F Enable/Disable

CODABLOCK F

z he following options apply to the odablock symbol

Codablock F Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesDabilityofReaderToDecodeId odablockD labelsR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Codablock F = Enable
Codablock F = Disable

Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesthei odablockD kgt subtypeDcodeDwithD t i UdinDtheDfirstDpositionMRR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the top

Codablock F EAN = Disable
Codablock F EAN = Enable

Codablock F AIM Check

ypecifiesifi heckj igitcalculationalgorithmdisg os Icompliantornot

	Codablock F AIM Check = Disable
Codablock F AIM Check = Enable Check C

Codablock F Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|odablock|l|symbology

Variable Length.1 or variablelengthdecoding|minimum|and|maximum|length|maybeset

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

	Codablock F Length Control = Variable Length
Codablock F = Fixed Length

Codablock F Set Length 1

ypeifiesoneofthebarcodelengthsforCodablock F Length ControlrengthUistheminimumlabellengthifinVariable Lengths odeForthefirstfixedlengthiflinFixed Lengths odeUrengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonlyNi characterscanbelsetfromTWtoIVYYcharacters

z able6 provides some examples for setting or length URyepage 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 6. CODABLOCK F Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	03 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODABLOCK F LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Three Characters FromAppendix D, Keypad	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘7’	‘0”,‘1’ and ‘5’
5Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Select Codablock F Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters

Codablock F Set Length 2

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|Codablock F Length Control|r ength|V|is|the|maximum|label|length|ifin|Variable Length|s ode|for|the|second|fixed|length|ifin|Fixed Length|
s ode#r ength#includes#the#barcode's#check#data#and#full#g yi oo#shift#characters#z he#length# does#notinclude#start#stop#characters#
z able77providesexamplesforsettingrengthNMyeelpage 303fordetailedinstructionsonsettingthisfeature

Table 7. CODABLOCK F Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODABLOCK F LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Three Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘7’	‘0”,‘1’ and ‘5’	‘0”,‘5’ AND ‘0’
5Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Select Codablock F Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

100 = Length 2 is 100 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)

z he following options apply to the of Ysymbology

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadloVofYbarcodesR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

12 of 5 = Enable

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

z hisoption enables disables calculation and verification of an optional doV of Y check character.

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation - cont.

12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check DHL
	12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Daimler Chrysler
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Bosch
	12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Italian Post

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with doV of Y barcode data

	12 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
12 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send	DEFAULT

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|an|o|V|of|Y|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
	12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4

2 of 5 Decoding Level

This configuration item applies to Interleaved 2 of 5, Datalogic 2 of 5 and Standard 2 of 5.

j encodingr evels|arelused|to|configure|a|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|belvery|aggressive|to|very|conservative|depending|on|a|particular|customer's|needs|yee|page 302|for|more|information|on|this|feature

2 of 5 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)

2 of 5 Decoding Level = 2

2 of 5 Decoding Level = 3

DEFAULT

2 of 5 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

2 of 5 Decoding Level = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | 2 of 5 Length Control

12 of 5 Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|of|V|of|Y|symbology|

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

DEFAULT

12 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

1 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for| 2 of 5 Length Control|r ength|U|is|the|
minimumlabellengthDifinVariable Lengths odeDorthefirstfixedlengthDifinFixed Length
s odeHz hellengthincludesthebarcode'scheckanddatacharactersHz hellengthcanbelsetfrom
VdtoDYT characters in increments of two
z able8 provides some examples for setting for length you page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature

Table 8.12 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		2 Characters 6	Characters 14	Characters 50	Characters
2	Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits	02 06 14 50
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘2’	‘0’ and ‘6’	‘1’ and ‘4’	‘5’ AND ‘0’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select 1 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters

12 of 5 Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for 2 of 5 Length Controlr lengthV is the maximum label length if in Variable Lengths ode or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
s ode#z he#lengthincludesthebarcode'scheckanddatacharacters
z he\length\can\be\set\from\V\to\YT\characters\g\setting\of\TT\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\Only\one\fixed\length\AR
z able9 provides examples for setting r length N yee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 9.12 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	Ignore This Length	4 Characters 14	Characters 50 Characters
2 Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits	00 04 14 50
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT I 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘4’ ‘1’ and ‘4’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select 12 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

I 2 of 5 Character Correlation

hen correlation is enabled the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding knabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and or voids hot may also help read labels that have damaged areas knabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly

12 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable

12 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable

I 2 of 5 Stitching

z hisoptionlenablesdisablesstitchingforloVofYlabelshenpartslofaloVofYbarcodearepresentedtothereaderwiththisfeatureenabledthebarcodepartswillbeassembledbythereader'ssoftwareandthedatawillbe decodedifallbarcodeproofingrequirementslaremet

DEFAULT

12 of 5 Stitching = Enable

12 of 5 Stitching = Disable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

FOLLETT 2 OF 5

z he following options apply to the ollett of Ysymbology

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesabilityofImagertodecodeOllettlVOfYlabelsR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Follett 2 of 5 = Enable
Follett 2 of 5 = Disable

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR

z helfollowingoptionsapplytothelonterleavedVofYDiovIn x lsymbolologyR

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesabilityofreadertodecodenonterleavedVOfYDi ovIn x DlabelsR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable

STANDARD 2 OF 5

z he following options apply to the ytandard of Ysymbology

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadystandardDVDofYbarcodesR

Standard 2 of 5 = Disable

Standard 2 of 5 = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

z hisoption enables disables calculation and verification of an optionally standard V of Y check character

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patterns

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

z his ^0 feature ^1 enablesSdisables ^2 transmission ^3 of ^4 an ^5 optionallytandard ^6 V ^7 of ^8 Y ^9 check ^10 character ^11

	Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|y|tandard|V|of|Y|label|must|be|decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
	Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4

Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level

The Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level feature is set using "2 of 5 Decoding Level" on page 172.

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

z his feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the y standard of Y symbology?

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set?

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|Standard 2 of 5 Length Control|r ength|U|is| the|minimum|label|length|if|in|Variable Length|s ode|or|the|first|fixed|length|if|in|Fixed Length| s ode|r ength|includes|the|barcode's|check|and|data|characters|z hellength|can|be|set|from|U|to|YT|characters|
z able10 provides some examples for setting for length you were page 302 if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 10. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	01 Character	07 Characters	15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

08 = Length 1 is 8 Characters

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|Standard 2 of 5 Length Control|r ength|V|is| the|maximum|label|length|if|in|Variable Length|s ode|or|the|second|fixed|length|if|in|Fixed Length|s ode|r ength|includes|the|barcode's|check|and|data|characters|
z he\length\can\be\set\from\DUD\to\YTT\characters\bg\setting\of\TT\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\Lonly\one\fixed\length\AR
z able11 provides examples for setting r length VYee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 11. Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1	Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes)	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation

Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation

hen correlation is enabled the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding knabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and or voids may also help read labels that have damaged areas knabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly

DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching

z hisoptionlenablesdisablesstitchingforytandardVofYlabelshenpartsofalytandardVofYbarcodearepresentedtothereaderwiththisfeatureenabledthebarcodepartswillbeassembledbythereader'ssoftwareandthedatawillbe decodedifallbarcodeproofingrequirementslarelmet

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5

z he following options apply to the industrial of Ysymbology

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesabilityofreadertodecodeIndustrialNofYlabels

Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable

Industrial 2 of 5 = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

knablesSj isables?calculationand?verificationof?an?optional?ondustrial?Of?Y?check?character

DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

knables\disables\transmission\of\an\ondustrial\DV\of\Y\check\character\$

	Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control

z hisfeaturespecifieseithervariablelengthdecodingforfixedlengthdecodingforthebondustrialVofDYSymbology

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

	Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1

z his{feature}specifies{one{ofthe}barcode{lengths}forIndustrial 2 of 5 Length Control{r}ength{U}is{the}minimumlabel{lengthif}in{Variable Lengths}ode{or{first}fixed{lengthif}in{Fixed Length}
s odeOrengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonlyHzhellengthcanbsetfromTToYTD characters
z able12 provides some examples for setting r length UR yee page 302 if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 12. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	'0' and '0'	'0' and '7'	'1' and '5'
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the bars

Select Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Controlr length Vis the maximum label length if in Variable Lengths ode or the second fixed length if in Fixed Lengths ode r ength includes the barcode's check data and full gy i o shift characters z hel length does not include start stop characters
z he\length\can\be\set\from\U\to\YT\characters\g\setting\of\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\Longly\one\fixed\length\K
z able13 provides examples for setting r length V8yee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 13. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’	‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Select Industrial 2 of5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|an|ondustrial|V|of|Y|label|must|be|decoded|before|it|dis|accepted|as|good|read

	Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
	Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4

Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching

knablesSdisablesDfixedDlengthDstitchingDforDondustrialDVDofDYR

Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation

knableSdisablesDcharacterDcorrelationDforDondustrialDVDofDYR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable

CODE IATA

z he following options apply to the log z g Symbolology

IATA Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablestheabilityofthereadertodecodeDog z g labelsR

IATA = Enable

IATA = Disable

IATA Check Character Transmission

knablesSj isables?calculationand?verificationof?an?optional?ondustrial?V?of?Y?check?characterk

	IATA Check Character Transmission = Disable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

DATALOGIC 2 OF 5

z he\following\options\apply\to\the\j atalogic\Vof\Y\symbology\

Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

henDisabledthereaderwillnotreadj atalogicV1ofY7barcodesR

DEFAULT

Datalogic 2 of 5 = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Datalogic 2 of 5 = Enable

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

z hisoptionlenablesdisablescalculationandverificationofanoptionalj atalogicMofDcheckcharacter

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

z hisfeaturespecifiestheminimumnumberofconsecutivetimesandj atalogicOfOfYlabelmustbe decodedbeforeitisacceptedasgoodread

	12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
	12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4

Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level

The Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level feature is set using "2 of 5 Decoding Level" on page 172.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control

z hisfeaturespecifieseithervariablelengthdecodingorfixedlengthdecodingforthej atalogicVloDYsymbolology?

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control|r ength|Uis| the|minimum|label|lengthif|in|Variable Length|s |ode|or|the|first|fixed|lengthif|in|Fixed Length|
s ode#z he#length#includes#the#barcode's#checkand#data#characters#z he#length#can#be#set#from#V#to#YT#characters#in#increments#of#two#
z able14 provides some examples for setting for length you page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 14. Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		2 Characters 6	Characters 14	Characters 50	Characters
2	Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits	02 06 14 50
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT Datalogic 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘2’	‘0’ and ‘6’	‘1’ and ‘4’	‘5’ AND ‘0’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Controlr lengthV is the maximum label length if in Variable Lengths ode or the second fixed length if in Fixed Lengths ode z he length includes the barcode's check and data characters
z he\length\can\be\set\from\DV\to\YT\characters\g\setting\of\TT\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\Only\one\fixed\length\AR
z able15 provides examples for settingr lengthVYee page 303for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 15. Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	Ignore This Length	4 Characters 14	Characters 50 Characters
2 Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits	00 04 14 50
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘4’	‘1’ and ‘4’	‘5’ AND ‘0’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation

hen correlation is enabled the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding knabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and or voids hot may also help read labels that have damaged areas knabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly

12 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable

12 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable

Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching

z hisoptionlenablesdisablesstitchingforj atalogicN0ffYlabels0 henpartsofaj atalogicN0ofYbarcodearepresentedtothereaderwiththisfeatureenabledthebarcodepartswillbe assembledbythereader'ssoftwareandthedatawillbe decodedifallbarcodeproofingrequirementslaredmet

Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable

Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Enable/Disable

CODABAR

z he following options apply to the i odabar symbology

Codabar Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadi odabarbarcodesR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central bar

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Codabar = Enable
Codabar = Disable

Codabar Check Character Calculation

knable this option to enable disables calculation and verification of an optional odabar check character then disabled any check character in the label is treated as data character

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Don't Calculate

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable AIM standard check char.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable Modulo 10 check char.

Codabar Check Character Transmission

knable this option to transmit the check character along with i odabar barcode data

	Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission

knable this option to enable disable transmission of i odabar start and stop characters

	Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Start/Stop Character Set

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set

z hisoptionspecifiestheformatoftransmittedi odabarstartStopcharacters

	Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD
	Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match

henenabledthisoptionrequiresthatstartandstopcharactersmatch

	Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don’t Require Match
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match

Codabar Quiet Zones

pecifics the number of quiet zones for i odabar labels w uiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a barcode and are typically UT times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label

Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
	Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Codabar Quiet Zones = Auto
	Codabar Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Minimum Reads

Codabar Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|i odabar|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Codabar Minimum Reads = 1
Codabar Minimum Reads = 2
	Codabar Minimum Reads = 3
Codabar Minimum Reads = 4

Codabar Decoding Level

j encodingr evels|are|used|to|configure|a|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|bel|very|aggressive|to|very|conservative|depending|on|a|particular|customer's|needs|yee|page 302|for|more|information|on|this|feature

Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
	Codabar Decoding Level = 2
Codabar Decoding Level = 3
	Codabar Decoding Level = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 5

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Length Control

Codabar Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|on|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|odabar|SYMBOLGY

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

DEFAULT

Codabar Length Control = Variable Length

Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

Codabar Set Length 1

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codabar Length Control, length is the minimum label length if in Variable Lengths ode for the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
s odeOr lengthincludesthe|barcode's|start|stop|check|and|data|characters Oz helength|must|include|at least done|data|character Oz helength|can|be|set|from|W|to|YT|charactersR
z able16 provides some examples for setting for length you page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 16. Codabar Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1	Desired Setting (and pad with leading zeroes)	03 Characters 09	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’ and ‘9’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Codabar Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters

Codabar Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codabar Length Control length (V is the) maximum label length if in Variable Length's ode for the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
s odeHz hellengthincludesthebarcode'sstartstopcheckanddatacharactersHz hellengthmustincludeatleastdonedatacharacter
z hélength can be set from W to Y characters g setting of T specifies to ignore this length Only one fixed length MR
z able17 provides examples for settingr lengthVYeepage 303for detailed instructions on settingthisfeature

Table 17. Codabar Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1	Desired Setting (and pad with leading zeroes)	00 Ignore This Length	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Codabar Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Codabar Interdigit Ratio

z his|feature|specifies|the|ratio|between|an|intercharacter|space|and|module|for|i odabar|labels|

	Codabar Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 1
	Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 2
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 3
	Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 4
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 5

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Interdigit Ratio

Codabar Interdigit Ratio — cont.

	Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 6
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 7
	Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 8
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 9
	Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 10

Codabar Character Correlation

hen correlation is enabled the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding knabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and or voids hot may also help read labels that have damaged areas knabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Codabar Character Correlation = Enable

Codabar Character Correlation = Disable

Codabar Stitching

z hisoption enables disables stitching for odabar labels hen parts of all odabar barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical bar

Codabar Stitching = Disable
Codabar Stitching = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ABC Codabar Enable/Disable

ABC CODABAR

z he following options apply to the g hi di odabar symbology

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesDabilityofReaderToIdecodeDghiDi odabarDlabelsR

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the bars

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

ABC Codabar = Enable
ABC Codabar = Disable

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode

ypecifiestheconcatenationmodebetweenytaticandj namic

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the top

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

ypecifiesthetimeoutinOUTQmillisecondticksusedbytheghi di odabarj dynamici oncatenations odeR

	ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec
	ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec
	ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ABC Codabar Force Concatenation

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation

1 orces|labels|starting|or|ending|with|j |to|be|concatenated|

DEFAULT

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable

CODE 11

z he following options apply to the i ode UU symbology

Code 11 Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadiodeUUUbarcodesR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Code 11 = Enable
Code 11 = Disable

Code 11 Check Character Calculation

z hisOptionEnablesSdisablesCalculationandVerificationOfOptionalDiodeUUCheckCharacterR

	Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C
	Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Check Character Transmission

Code 11 Check Character Transmission

z hisfeatureenablesdisablestransmissionofanoptionaliodeUUcheckcharacter

	Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 11 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|ode|UU|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Code 11 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 2
	Code 11 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 4

Code 11 Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|ode|UU|symbolology|

Variable Length.l or variableLengthdecoding minimumand maximumlengthmay set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 11 Set Length 1

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 11 Length Control length is the
minimumlabelLengthifinVariable Lengths odeNorthefirstfixedlengthifinFixed Length
s odeOrengthincludesthebarcode'scheckanddatacharactersHz hellengthcanbelsetfromVtoYTcharactersR
z able18 provides some examples for setting r length UR yee page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 18. Code 11 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1	Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes)	02 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Code 11 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

04 = Length 1 is 4 Characters

Code 11 Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 11 Length Control or length V is the maximum label length if in Variable Lengths ode for the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
s ode Dr ength includes the barcode's check and data characters
z he\length can be set from to YT characters g setting of T specifies to ignore this length Only one fixed length
z able19 provides examples for setting r length V0yee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 19. Code 11 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1	Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes)	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘0’ and ‘F’ ‘3’ AND 2’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Interdigit Ratio

Code 11 Interdigit Ratio

z his|feature|specifies|the|ratio|between|an|intercharacter|space|and|module|for|i ode|UUU|labels|

	Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 1
	Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 2
Code11 Interdigit Ratio = 3
	Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 4
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 5

Code 11 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio — cont.

	Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 6
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 7
	Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 8
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 9
	Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 10

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Decoding Level

Code 11 Decoding Level

j encodingr evels|are|used|to|configure|a|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|be|very|aggressive|to|very|conservative|depending|on|a|particular|customer's|needs|yee|page 302|for|more|information|on|this|feature|

Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
	Codabar Decoding Level = 2
Codabar Decoding Level = 3
	Codabar Decoding Level = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

Code 11 Character Correlation

hen correlation is enabled the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding knabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and or voids hot may also help read labels that have damaged areas knabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Code 11 Character Correlation = Enable

Code 11 Character Correlation = Disable

Code 11 Stitching

z hisoptionenablesdisablesstitchingfori odeUUlabelshenpartsofaii odeUUbarcodearepresentedtothereaderwiththisfeatureenabledthebarcodepartswillbeassembledbythereader'ssoftwareandthedatawillbe decodedifallbarcodeproofingrequirementslaremet

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 11 Stitching = Enable

Code 11 Stitching = Disable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL

z helfollowingoptionsapplytothemyUj atah arTMu mnidirectionalDlformerlyx yyQUXID symbology

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable

hendisabledthereaderwillnotreadmyUj atah arTMu mnidirectionalbarcodes

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation

henEnabledMyU0j atah arTMu mnidirectionalbarcodeswillbetranslatedtothemyUQUV labeldataformatk

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|myU|j atah ar™|

u mnidirectionallabelmustbe decodedbeforeitisacceptedasgoodread

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the top

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 2

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 3

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED

z he\following\options\apply\to\the\myUj\ atah arTMk x panded\ formerly\x yy\k x panded\ symboly

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable

hendisabledthereaderwillnotreadmyUj atah ar™k x panded barcodes

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation

henenabledPmyU0j atah arTMk x pandedbarcodeswillbetranslatedtotheMyUQUV labelD dataformatR

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|myUj |atah ar™|k x panded|label|must|be|decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read

	GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 2
	GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 4

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control

z hisfeaturespecifieseithervariablelengthdecodingorfixedlengthdecodingforthemyUjatah ar™kxpandedsymbology

Variable Length.1 or variableLengthdecodingdaminimumlengthmaybesetR

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Variable Length

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1

z his feature specifies one of the barcode length for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control r ength is the minimum label length if in Variable Lengths ode or the first fixed length if in Fixed Lengths ode r ength includes the barcode's data characters only z he length can be set from U to [ X characters]
z able20providessomeexamplesforsettingrengthDUDyeepage 302fordetailedinstructionson settingthisfeaturek

Table 20. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	01 Character	07 Characters	52 Characters	74 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT GS1 DataBarTM EXPANDED LENGTH 1SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘1’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘5’ and ‘2’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control|r length|V|is|the|maximum|label|length|if|in|Variable Length|s ode|for|the|second|fixed|length|if|in|Fixed Length|s ode|r ength|includes|the|barcode's|data|characters|only|Hz hel|length|can|be|set|from|U|to|D X|characters|g |setting|of|T|specifies|to|ignore|this|length|only|one|fixed|length|AR z able|21|provides|examples|for|setting|r ength|V|yee|page 303|for|detailed|instructions|on|setting|this|feature

Table 21. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 (ignore second length)	07 Characters 52	Characters 74 Characters	Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT GS1 DataBarTM EXPANDED LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	'0' and '0' '0' and '7' '5' and '2' '7' and '4'
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

74 = Length 2 is 74 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED

z he\following\options\apply\to\the\myUj\ atah arTM\dr imited\Lformerlylx yy\dr imited\MD symbology\R

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable

henDisabledtheReaderwillnotreadmyUj atah ar™r imitedbarcodesR

DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation

henEnabledPmyUj atah ar™r imitedDbarcodeswillbetranslatedtotheMyUQUV labeldataformatR

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|myU|j atah ar™|r imited|label|must|be|decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read

	GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 2
	GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Enable/Disable

CODE 93

z he following options apply to the i ode^W symbology

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Code 93 = Enable
Code 93 = Disable

Code 93 Check Character Calculation

knablesSdisablesCalculationandVerificationofanOptionaliode^Wcheckcharacter

	Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C
	Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C and K

Code 93 Check Character Transmission

knables\disables\transmission\of\an\optional\i ode^W\check\character\$

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Code 93 Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|ode|^W symbology|

Variable Length.l or variableLengthdecoding[minimum] and maximumlengthmaybeiset

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length

Code 93 = Fixed Length

Code 93 Set Length 1

ypeifiesoneofthebarcodelengthsforCode 93 Length ControlrengthUistheminimumlabellengthifinVariable Lengths odeNorthefirstfixedlengthifinFixed Lengths odeUrengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonly Oz helengthcanbelsefromTUtoYTcharacters

z able22 provides some examples for setting r length DURyee page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 22. Code 93 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	01 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘1’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’
5Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Select Code 93 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Code 93 Set Length 2

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|Code 93 Length Control|r ength|Vois|the|maximum|label|length|if|in|Variable Length|s ode|for|the|second|fixed|length|if|in|Fixed Length|s ode|R ength|includes|the|barcode's|check|data|and|full|g yi oodshift|characters||z he|length| does|not|include|start|stop|characters||z he|length|can|be|set|from|U|to|YT|characters||g |setting|of|T|specifies|to|ignore|this|length|Lonly|one|fixed|lengthAR
z able23 provides examples for setting r length N yee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 23. CODE 93 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters	Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a horizontal bar at the bottom

Select Code 93 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Minimum Reads

Code 93 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|ode|^W|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Code 93 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 2
	Code 93 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 4

Code 93 Decoding Level

ypeifies the decoding level for i ode^W0j encoding r evels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs yee page 302 for more information on this feature

	Code 93 Decoding Level = Disable
Code 93 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
	Code 93 Decoding Level = 2
Code 93 Decoding Level = 3
	Code 93 Decoding Level = 4
Code 93 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Quiet Zones

Code 93 Quiet Zones

knablesSdisablesDquietDzonesDforDi odeD^WR

	Code 93 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
	Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Auto
	Code 93 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides

Code 93 Stitching

j isableEnableFixedOrvariableLengthStitchingForDi ode^WR

	Code 93 Stitching = Disable
Code 93 Stitching = Enable

Code 93 Character Correlation

knablesSdisablesDi caracterDi orrelationForDi odeD^WR

	Code 93 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 93 Character Correlation = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MSI Enable/Disable

MSI

z helfollowingoptionsapplytotheys yo)symbology

MSI Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesabilityofreadertodecodes yolabelsR

DEFAULT

MSI = Enable

MSI = Disable

MSI Check Character Calculation

knablesSj isables?calculationand?verificationof?an?optionals yo?check?character

MSI Check Character Transmission

knablesSdisablesTransmissionDofands yocheckCharacterR

	MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable
MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable

MSI Length Control

z his|feature|specifies|either|variable|length|decoding|or|fixed|length|decoding|for|the|s yo|symbology|

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length maybe set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

MSI Length Control = Variable Length

MSI Set Length 1

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|MSI Length Control|r length|U|is|the|minimum|label|length|if|in|Variable Length|s |ode|or|the|first|fixed|length|if|in|Fixed Length|
s odeOrengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonlyHz he#lengthcanbesetfromJTUD toDYTcharactersR
z able24 provides some examples for setting for length you page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 24. MSI Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	01 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D, Keypad	'0' and '1'	'0' and '7'	'1' and '5'
5Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Select MSI Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

MSI Set Length 2

z hisfeaturespecifiesoneofthebarcodelengthsforMSI Length ControlrengthDisthe maximumlabellengthDifinVariable Lengths odeOrthesecondfixedlengthDifinFixed Lengths odeOrengthincludesthebarcode'scheckDataandfullQgyi ooshiftcharacters
z he\length\does\not\include\DstartSstop\charactersR
z hélength can belset from UU to YT characters g setting of IT specifies to ignore this length Lonly done fixed length AR
z able25 provides examples for setting r length VYee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 25. MSI Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’	‘5’ AND ‘0’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Select MSI Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MSI Minimum Reads

MSI Minimum Reads

z his ^feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times and y label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read

	MSI Minimum Reads = 1
MSI Minimum Reads = 2
	MSI Minimum Reads = 3
MSI Minimum Reads = 4

MSI Decoding Level

ypeifiesthedecodinglevelforms yoj encodingr evelsareusedtoconfigureabarcode symbologydecodertobeveryaggressivetoveryconservativedependingondaparticular customer'sneedsyeepage 302formoreinformationonthisfeaturek

	MSI Decoding Level = Disable
MSI Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
	MSI Decoding Level = 2
MSI Decoding Level = 3
	MSI Decoding Level = 4
MSI Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Enable/Disable

PLESSEY

z he following options apply to the v lessey symbology

Plessey Enable/Disable

knablesSj isablesabilityofreadertodecodev lesseylabelsR

DEFAULT

Plessey = Disable

Plessey = Enable

Plessey Check Character Calculation

knablesSj isablescalculationandverificationofanoptionalv lesseycheckcharacterR

	Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. check char. verification
	Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Anker check char. verification
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification

Plessey Check Character Transmission

knables\disables\transmission\of\and\s yo\check\character\

	Plessey Check Character Transmission = Disable
Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Length Control

Plessey Length Control

z his ^feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the v lessey symbology

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Plessey Length Control = Variable Length
Plessey = Fixed Length

Plessey Set Length 1

z his|feature|specifies|one|of|the|barcode|lengths|for|Plessey Length Control|r ength|U|is|the|minimum|label|length|if|in|Variable Length|s ode|for|the|first|fixed|length|if|in|Fixed Length|
s odeOr lengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonlyHz helengthcanbesetfromITUtoYTD charactersR
z able26 provides some examples for setting or length you were page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 26. Plessey Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	01 Characters 07	Characters 15 Characters	50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT Plessey LENGTH 1 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	'0' and '1'	'0' and '7'	'1' and '5'
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Select Plessey Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Plessey Set Length 2

z his feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Plessey Length Control for length is the maximum label length if in Variable Lengths ode or the second fixed length if in Fixed Lengths ode or length includes the barcode's check data and full gy i o shift characters z hel length does not include start stop characters
z he\length\can\be\set\from\U\to\YT\characters\g\setting\of\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\Longly\one\fixed\length\K
z able27 provides examples for setting r length V8yee page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature

Table 27. Plessey Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	00 (Ignore This Length)	07 Characters 15	Characters 50 Characters
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT PLESSEY LENGTH 2 SETTING
4	Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘7’	‘1’ and ‘5’	‘5’ AND ‘0’
5Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patterns

Select Plessey Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Plessey Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|v|lessey|label|must|be| decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Plessey Minimum Reads = 1
Plessey Minimum Reads = 2
	Plessey Minimum Reads = 3
Plessey Minimum Reads = 4

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Decoding Level

Plessey Decoding Level

ypecifies the decoding level for v lessey j encoding r evels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs yee page 302 for more information on this feature

	Plessey Decoding Level = Disable
Plessey Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
	Plessey Decoding Level = 2
Plessey Decoding Level = 3
	Plessey Decoding Level = 4
Plessey Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)

Plessey ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Plessey Stitching

knablesSdisablesDfixedDlengthDstitchingDforDv lesseyR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Plessey Stitching = Enable
Plessey Stitching = Disable

Plessey Character Correlation

knablesSdisablesDi characterDi orrelationDforDv lesseyR

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Plessey Character Correlation = Disable
Plessey Character Correlation = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 4 Enable/Disable

CODE 4

z he following options apply to the i ode X Symbolology

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a horizontal bar at the bottom

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Code 4 = Enable
Code 4 = Disable

Code 4 Check Character Transmission

z his ^D feature ^D enables ^S disables ^D transmission ^D of ^D an ^D optional ^D i ^D ode ^D X ^D check ^D character ^R

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom

Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Send

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion

z his|feature|enables|disables|the|conversion|of|hexidecimal|label|data|to|decimal|label|data|

	Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Disable
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Enable

CODE 5

z he following options apply to the i ode Y symbology

	Code 5 = Disable
Code 5 = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 5 Check Character Transmission

Code 5 Check Character Transmission

z hisfeatureenablesdisablestransmissionofanoptionalDi odeYcheckcharacterR

	Code 5 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
Code 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion

z hisfeature enables disables the conversion of hexadecimal label data to decimal label data

	Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Disable
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Enable

CODE 4 AND CODE 5 COMMON CONFIGURATION ITEMS

z he following options apply to both i ode X and i ode Y symbols

Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level

j encodingr evelslarelusedtoconfigurea|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|belvery|aggressive|to|very|conservative|dependingon|a|particular|customer's|needs|yee|page 291|for|more|information|on this|feature

This configuration item applies to Code 4 and Code 5.

Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
	Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 2
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 3
	Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 4
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads

Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads

z his|feature|specifies|the|minimum|number|of|consecutive|times|a|i ode|Xor|i ode|Y|label|must|be|decoded|before|it|is|accepted|as|good|read|

	Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 2
	Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 4

NOTES

Chapter 4

Wireless Features

The features in this section are valid only for the GM4100 and GBT4100 models.

z his|section|provides|options|and|programming|related|to|the|reader's|yz g x |and|h bluetooth|| communication|features||x eference|Appendix B, Standard Defaults|for|a|listing|of|standard|factory|settings|

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES starting on page 259
• Good Transmission Beep	• Disconnect Beep
• Beep Frequency	• Base Station Beep
• Beep Duration	• Leash Alarm
• Beep Volume	•
CONFIGURATION UPDATES starting on page 264
• Automatic Configuration Update	• Automatic Flash Update
• Copy Configuration to Scanner	• Request Flash Update
• Copy Configuration to Base Station	•
POWERDOWN TIMEOUT starting on page 266
BATCH FEATURES starting on page 268
• Batch Mode	• Erase Batch Memory
• Send Batch	• RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK starting on page 270
RF ADDRESS STAMPING starting on page 270
• Source Radio Address Transmission	• Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY starting on page 272
• STAR Radio Protocol Timeout	• STAR Radio Transmit Mode
DISPLAY FEATURES starting on page 274
• Contrast	• Display Mode
• Font Size • Display Timeout
• Backlight • Keypad Select
BLUETOOTH-ONLY FEATURES starting on page 279
BT SECURITY FEATURES
• BT Security Mode • Select PIN Code Length
• BT Pin Code • Set PIN Code
BT HID FEATURES
• BT HID Variable PIN Code	• BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char
• BT HID ALT Mode •
OTHER BT FEATURES	•
BT Poll Rate •

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Good Transmission Beep

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES

yeveralloptionslareavailabletoconfigurebeeperbehaviorforx1operation

Good Transmission Beep

knablesdisablestheimoodzransmissionheepindicationhenenabledMabbeepoccurswhendaarabeldiscorrectlytransmittedtothebase

	Good Transmission Beep = Disable
Good Transmission Beep = Enable

Beep Frequency

g djustsradiospecificbeepindicationstosoundataallowmediumorhighfrequencyselectablefromtheListbelowLiontrolsthebeeper'spitchStoneM

	Beep Frequency = Low
Beep Frequency = Medium
	Beep Frequency = High

Beep Duration

z his|feature|controls|the|duration|of|radio|specific|beep|indications.

	Beep Duration = 60 msec
Beep Duration = 80 msec
	Beep Duration = 100 msec
Beep Duration = 120 msec
	Beep Duration = 140 msec
Beep Duration = 160 msec
	Beep Duration = 180 msec
Beep Duration = 200 msec

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Beep Volume

Beep Volume

yelects{the}beeper-volumeCloudnessofradio{specific}beepindicationszhereare{three}selectablevolumelevelsk

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the bars

Beep Volume = Low

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Beep Volume = Medium

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the bars

Beep Volume = High

Disconnect Beep

knablesdisablesthebeepindicationthatahandheldhasbecomeconnectedordisconnectedfromahaselytation

The defaults are different for the STAR and BT models.

GM 4100 STAR default

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central bar

Disconnect Beep = Disable

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central pattern

Disconnect Beep = Enable

DEFAULT

BT default

Base Station Beep

knables\disables\a\beep\indication\when\thehandheld\isplaced\in\theh\ase\ytation\

	BT Base Station Beep = Disable
BT Base Station Beep = Enable

Leash Alarm

z hissettingspecifiesthenumberofsecondstosoundtheireashs odeibeepsthreepersecond whenthehandheldgoesoutofrangeHz hisisespeciallyusefulininstanceswherethereader mightinadvertentlyhavebeenplacedinlabaglorcart

1 or this mode to be effective reader must be linked to the aseylation and Sleep Mode Timeout on page 94 must be disabled of the reader is asleep or disconnected from the aseylation there is no way for it to know where it is relative to the aseylation because communication is not active between the devices

	Leash Alarm = Disabled
Leash Alarm = 1 Second
	Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Leash Alarm

Leash Alarm — cont.

Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds
	Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds
	Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds
	Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds

Automatic Configuration Update

henthisfeatureisenabledPareaderanditslinkedhaselytationcanautomaticallyensuretheystayinsyncwithregardtolapplicationhardwareandSorconfigurationyeepage 318formoreinformationonthisfeature0

	Automatic Configuration Update = Disable
Automatic Configuration Update = Enable

Copy Configuration to Scanner

ycan the following label to copy the current h aseytation configuration to the scanner ' set this method when the g utoli onfiguration' pdate feature is disabled and you want alone time configuration update to be performed on the scanner

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Copy Configuration to Scanner

Copy Configuration to Base Station

ycan the following label to copy the current scanner configuration to the hasylation' set this method when the g uto i onfiguration' pdate feature is disabled and you want alone time configuration update to be performed on the hasylation

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this barcode.

Automatic Flash Update

z his ^D feature ^D enables ^S disables ^D the ^A automatic ^D flash ^D update ^D of ^D a ^D reader ^R

This item is valid only with POS version of Base Station (model 4010).

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

Automatic Flash Update = Disable
Automatic Flash Update = Enable

Request Flash Update

ycan(this)barcode to request a flash update from a h asetytation

NOTE

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

Request Flash Update

Powerdown Timeout

z hervowerdownz imeoutfeaturesetsthetimeforautomaticallyswitchingtheunitoffwhentheimagerhasbeenidle

	Powerdown Timeout = Disable
Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes
	Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes
Powerdown Timeout = 30 minutes

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Powerdown Timeout

Powerdown Timeout — continued

Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour)
	Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours)
Powerdown Timeout = 4 Hours
	Powerdown Timeout = 6 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 8 Hours
	Powerdown Timeout = 16 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 24 Hours

BATCH FEATURES

Batch Mode

z his|option|specifies{whether|to|store|labels|in|the|handheld|while|disconnected|from|the|base|u p tions|are|as|follows'

• Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels.
• Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out of range and is disconnected from the remote device
• Manual — The handheld will always store labels to allash memory and user must manage ally send the stored labels to the remote device using a special batch send label

DEFAULT

Batch Mode = Disabled

Batch Mode = Automatic

Batch Mode = Manual

Send Batch

'sel this barcode to initiate sending of labels stored in batch memory

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

Send Batch

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Erase Batch Memory

Erase Batch Memory

'sethisbarcode]toeraseanylabelsstoredinbatchmemory?

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Erase Batch Memory

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay

ypecifies the delay in UT msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch memory

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK

z his ^feature enables ^disables the ^ability to ^link ^wireless handheld ^to ^base station ^without scanning ^the 'nlink ^label first ^first

DEFAULT

Direct Radio Link = Unlink Label Required

Direct Radio Link = Automatic Unlinking

RF ADDRESS STAMPING

z heselfeaturesallowconfigurationofsourceradiodatainclusion

Source Radio Address Transmission

knablesdisablestheabilityofsourceradioaddressinformationtobetransmittedtothehostandifisophatwhatpositionwithrespecttothelabeldatayeepage 318in"x eferences"fordetailedinformationandexamplesforsettingthisfeature

When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all label formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12 ascii characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as (shown in hex): 30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44

DEFAULT

Source Radio Address Transmission = Do Not Include

Source Radio Address Transmission = Prefix

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on page 270 is enabled.

Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

00 = No Delimiter Character

Features for Star Models Only

z hefeaturesinthissectionarevalidonlyforthemryphonoms XUTTytarmodel

• STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
• STAR Radio Transmit Mode

DISPLAY FEATURES starting on page 274

• Contrast
• Font Size
• Backlight
• Display Mode
• Display Timeout
• Keypad Select

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

z his|parameter|sets|the|valid|wait|time|before|transmission|between|the|handheld|reader|and|h ase|ytation|is|considered|failed|

hensetting this parameter take into consideration the radio traffic number of readers in the same area z he selectable range for this feature is from TV to VY seconds yee page 320 in "x references" for detailed information and examples for setting this feature

Set Radio Protocol Timeout

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

DEFAULT

02 = 2 Seconds Radio Protocol Timeout

STAR Radio Transmit Mode

ypecifies the transmission protocol for tar communications

u p tionsDare'

• ACK from cradle to scanner — signals a good transmission (as soon as the assayation) receives all label
• ACK when sent to host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host
• ACK from host — scanner signals a good transmis sionas!soonas!thehasetytationhassent thelabelto!thehostandhosthasrepliedwithanlacknowledgemeagage

ACK from cradle

ACK when sent to host

ACK from host

ACK from host works only for RS232 or USB-COM interfaces with ACK/NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host.

See "Message Formatting" on page 323 for details.

DISPLAY FEATURES

Contrast

x eaddtheCodeuntilthedesiredcontrastdisreached

Font Size

DEFAULT

Font size = Small

Font size = Medium

Font size = Large

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Backlight

Backlight

	Display backlight = off
Display backlight = on

Display Mode

z he\user\can\control\the\reader\display\behavior\according\to\various\selections\Myee\page 318\in

“x eferences”Dfor detailedinformationabouteachfeature

Display Timeout

ypecifieshowlongthe|displaywillremainon|after|adisplay|writej isplayisforcedon|afterany|display|writeor|afterany|reading|phasej isplayandbacklightare|turnedoff|afterthis|timeout|expires

Display Timeout = Disable
	Display Timeout = 1 Second
Display Timeout = 2 Seconds
	Display Timeout = 3 Seconds
Display Timeout = 4 Seconds

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Display Timeout

Display Timeout - cont.

	Display Timeout = 5 Seconds
Display Timeout= 6 Seconds
	Display Timeout = 7 Seconds
Display Timeout = 8 Seconds
	Display Timeout = 9 Seconds
Display Timeout = 9.9 Seconds (9,900ms max.)

Keypad Select

z his|parameter|specifies|the|character|that|has|to|b|sent|from|the|scanner|when|done|of|the|three|keys|are|pressed|or|example|when|key|dis|pressed|a|Tx|wi |D|b|character|d|sent|

I allow these instructions to set this feature

URDj eterminethedesiredsettingR

VDDycanthe0kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot m0s u j kDbarcode0toenterDvrogramming0 s odeR

WRDycanthebarcode'Dj oyvrg-Dq k-vgj Dykrki z R

XR z henreadDNk” charactersDintheOrangeTUQL kfromthekeypadDinAppendix D, KeypadD correspondingtotherightcenterandleftkeysrespectively

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

ycanthekt z kx Sk" oz lvx u mx gs s ot mls u j kJbarcodetoExitvrogrammings ode

	Disable Keypad
Enable Keypad Select
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.	CANCEL

Disable Keypad

DEFAULT

CANCEL

3C3D3E

Bluetooth-Only Features

z hellofeatures in this section are valid only for mryphon h bluetooth models g Iso reference the setup section for instructions on Linking a BT Reader to a PC, starting on page 26

v leaseupdatethelistdasbelow

BT SECURITY FEATURES

• BT Security Mode
• BT Pin Code

- Select PIN Code Length

- Set PIN Code

BT HID FEATURES

• BT HID Variable PIN Code
- BT HID ALT Mode
• BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char

OTHER BT FEATURES

- BT Poll Rate

BT SECURITY FEATURES

z he!hz [system]can!be!set!up!to!require!a!configurable!vot [code]to!authenticateSconnect!hz ] devices!and?encrypt!the!data!nz his!can!be!donelin!one!oftwo!ways'

• The scanner can be programmed with a PIN code using the bar codes in this section.
• The Host can be set up to specify a custom security PIN code when a scanner attempts to connect or more information about this feature? contact; atalogic; echnically support?

The Gryphon GBT4100 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to the host. If you are adding new equipment to a system that uses a custom security PIN, please read this section for information before proceeding.

1 ollow these steps to set the v ot code for a scanner

UdknableHz (ysecurity)s ode|by|scanning|the|Fknable"dbarcode|belowR

VByelectaAvot codeLengthofEitherXOrU charactersbyscanningtheappropriatebarcode in"Select PIN Code Length" on page 281R

wc ycantherelevantbarcodefrom"Set PIN Code" on page 281thenscanthedesiredalphaQ numericcharactersfromthekeypadinAppendix D, KeypadtosettheIvot Icode

yee"BT-Only Features" on page 321DinDfx eferences"formoredetailedinformationandexamplesforthisfeature

BT Security Mode

z his|feature|enables|disables|authentication|and|encryption|of|the|hz |link|’ set|the|feature|”BT Pin Code" on page 281|to|specify|the|pin|code|used|to|authenticate|the|hz |r ink|

NOTE
Changing the security mode setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting, the Security Mode setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated the devices must be relinked.

DEFAULT

BT Security Mode = Disable

BT Security Mode = Enable

BT Pin Code

g fterenabling|security|s ode|see|FBT Security Mode on page 280|specify|whether|you want|to|set|a|X|digit|or|a|U (digit|vot Di ode|yee|page 321|for|detailed|information|and|examples|for|setting|this|feature|

Select PIN Code Length

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.

Select 16-character BT PIN Code

Select 4-character BT PIN Code

Set PIN Code

j etermine the desired characters for the v or code then convert to hexadecimal using the gy i ooli hart on the inside back cover of this manual yee page 321 for detailed information and examples for setting this feature

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols

Set 4-character BT Pin Code

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the desired bar code, followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D. Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

DEFAULT

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.

Set 16-character BT PIN Code

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

BT HID FEATURES

BT HID Variable PIN Code

z his|feature|specifies|the|selection|available|for|ytatic|or|“ ariable|v indi ode|when|hz |n oj |profile|is|configured|

Use Static PIN Code
	Use Variable PIN Code

BT HID ALT Mode

z hisfeatureknablesj isablestheabilityto|transmit|correctly|label|contentto|the|host| regardlessofthe|hz In oj |i ountrys ode|selected|when|hz In oj |profile|is|configuredR

HID ALT Mode = Disable
	HID ALT Mode = Enable

BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char

z hisfeatureknableSj isabletheabilityofaHz In n Ito transmitdaLabelcontaininganUnknowncharacteritothehostwhenHz In oj profileisconfigured

HID Send Unkown ASCII Char = Disable
	HID Send Unkown ASCII Char = Enable

OTHER BT FEATURES

BT Poll Rate

z hisfeaturespecifiesthetimebetweenhh z Dpolls

BT Poll Rate = Maximum BT Poll Rate
	BT Poll Rate = 10 ms
BT Poll Rate = 20 ms
	BT Poll Rate = 30 ms
BT Poll Rate = 50 ms
	BT Poll Rate = 100 ms
BT Poll Rate = 150 ms
	BT Poll Rate = 200 ms
BT Poll Rate = 500 ms
	BT Poll Rate = 990 ms

NOTES

Chapter 5

Laser Features

z heelfeaturesinthissectionarevalidfortheImryphonDrlmj XWTTmodelonlyR

LASER SCAN ANGLE on page 288

LASER IDLE MODE on page 288

BI-DIRECTIONAL READ DECODING on page 289

ALWAYS ON SCAN MODE TIMEOUT on page 290

z his|section|provides|options|and|programming|related|to|the|reader's|laser|features|x eference|Appendix B, Standard Defaults|for|a|listing|of|standard|factory|settings

For hands-free or stand operations, it is recommended that Flashing scan mode be used. See "Scan Mode" on page 101 for programming labels for this feature. For more information, go to page 314 in "References".

Laser Scan Angle

z his|feature|sets|the|scan|angle|for|the|laser|z helt arrow|scan|angle|is|helpful|for|selecting|and|reading|specific|barcode|among|tight|grouping|of|labels|

DEFAULT

Laser Scan Angle = Normal (47 degrees)

Laser Scan Angle = Narrow (35 degrees)

Laser Idle Mode

raserodlels odeoptiondisapplicablefortriggeringinglez riggern oldMultiple & Trigger Pulses multipleonly
z his|configuration|provides|control|over|the|laser|scanning|motor|when|the|laser|is|not|actively|scanning||z he|options|are'

Dither Disable .yhutsdownthemotorlaser mirr dithering during laser engine idle time to reduce overall scanner power consumption

Dither Enable. lgllowsthelaserenginemotortocontinueditheringwhenlaserisnotactiveallmayprovideanimprovedreadresponsetime

DEFAULT

Dither Disable

Dither Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Bi-Directional Read Decoding

Bi-Directional Read Decoding

z hisconfigurationprovidescontroloverthegoodreadandbarcodelabelrequirementz hisprogrammingoptionformyphonraseraffectsallbarcodesymbolologies
Bi-Directional Read Disable. henhidirectionalreadingisdisabledthelaserscanisonlyrequiredtoobtainaValidlabelreadinlonescanningdirection
Bi-Directional Read Enable. I hen enabled the reader is must obtain valid good read in both scanning directions as part of the label reads decode process, k nabled will provides increased decode reliability

	Bi-Directional Read Disable
Bi-Directional Read Enable

Always On Scan Mode Timeout

hen the mryphon or aserising lwaysu nscanningmodetimeoutperiodscanbeconfigured of the programmed g lwaysu nz imeoutelapses the reader will shutdown and a trigger pull is required to resume operation

	Always On Timeout: 1 Hour
Always On Timeout: 2 Hours
	Always On Timeout: 3 Hours
Always On Timeout: 4 Hours
	Always On Timeout: 5 Hours

Chapter 6 References

z hissectioncontainsexplanationsandexamplesofselectedbarcodefeaturesyeethei onfigurationsectionfortheactualbarcodelabelsusedtoconfigurethereader

RS-232 Parameters

RS-232 Only

Baud Rate

haudrateisthenumberofbitsofdatatransmittedpersecondyetthereaderisbaudrateto matchthebaudratesettingofthehostdeviceithanimproperbaudratesettingdatamaynotreachthehostcorrectly

Stop Bits

z helstopbitls@atthe|endofeach|transmitted|character|marks|the|endof|transmission|one|character|and|prepares|the|receiving|device|for|the|next|character|in|the|serial|data|stream|z|hel|number|of|stopbits|selected|one|or|two|depends|on|the|number|the|receiving|terminal|is|programmed|to|accommodate|yet|the|number|of|stopbits|to|match|host|device|requirements|

Parity

z hisfeaturespecifiesparityrequiredforsendingandreceivingdatagparitycheckbitisthemostsignificantbitofeachgyi oolcodedcharacteryelectthelparitytypeaccordingtohostdevicerequirements

• Select None when no parity bit is required.
• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd-number of Ubits are contained in the coded character
• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of Ubits are contained in the coded character

Handshaking Control

z heldatainterfaceconsistsofanlx yVWVportdesignedtooperateeitherwithorwithoutthehardwarehandshakinglinesRequest to Sendlx z yWANDClear to Send Li z yWNDn andshakingiontrollincludesthefollowingoptions'

• RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.

• RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.

• RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and "u11 gate transmissions"

• RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.

x z ySi z ylycanDi ontrol—Ix z yldisasserted during transmissionsDi z ygatestransmissionsand controlsdenableanddisablestateofscanner

RS-232/USB COM Parameters

Intercharacter Delay

z his|parameter|specifies|the|intercharacter|delay between|the|end|of|one|character|and|the|beginning|of|the|next|z heldelay|can|belset|within|a|range|of|zero|LT|to|^T|milliseconds|in|UTms|increments|g |setting|of|zero|specifies|no|delay|
z o set the delay

URdj eterminethedesiredsettingdinmillisecondsR

VRj ividethedesiredsettingbyUTOLsettingdisDinDUTmsIncrementsMDv adtheresultwithleadQ ingzeroestoyieldtwodigitsR01 orexampleDTcDTTPY0cDTYPNT0cNTPDetc

WRDycanthe0kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx gs s ot mds u j kDbarcode1toenterDvrogramming1s odeK

XR mo to page X[ band scan the barcode 'ykr ki z lot z kxi n gx gi z kx j kr g - ykz Q z ot m]
Yr ycan the appropriate tw oldigits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indica tion after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

RbycantheOkt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mds u j kDbarcodeDtoDexitR

z his completes the procedure yee z able IV for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 28. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	50ms 150ms	600ms 850ms
2 Divide by 10 (pad with leading zeroes to yield two-digits)	05 15 60	85
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING
5 Scan Two Characters From g ppendix Dj Pq eypad	'0' and '5'	'5' and '0'	'6' and '0'	'8' and '5'
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ACK NAK Options

z hisenablesdisablestheabilityofthereadertosupporttheix yQVWVg i q St g q protocolhenconfiguredthereaderandsorhostsendslan“g i q ”whenditreceivesdataproperlymandsendst“t g q ”whenthedataisinerror

u p tionsDare

• Disable
• Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when[label]sent
• Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command
• Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

ACK Character

z hissettingspecifiesanlg yi oo|characterorhexvalueltobeused|as|thelg i q characterg yi oo| charactersoranyhexvalueltromTtoTx1 l canbe|selected

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option j ataħitshas been set as 7 Data Bits.

Urdj etermine the desired character value

VR ' selthe|gyi ooli hart|on|the|inside|back|cover|of|this|manual|to|find|the|hex|equivalent| for|the|desired|character\$value

WR moDtoDpageYTDandDscanDkt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j kDtoDenterDvrogramQ mingDs odeR

Xrycanthebarcode‘Dykr ki z Dgi q Di n gx gi z kx Dykzz ot mR

Ydycantheappropriatetwoalpha(numeric)ch aractersfromthekeypadinlgppendixj Dq eyq padthatrepresenttheidesiredcharactersvaluedinstepDZ aboveHz helsecondcharacterwill causealtwo@beepindication

RdycandtheOkt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j kDbarcodeDtoDexitR

yeelz ableV^forsomeexamplesofhowtosetthisfeature

Table 29. ACK Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Character/Value2	Hex equivalent from gy i oo]i hart	ACK $ @ >0x06 0x24 0x40		0x3E
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters fromg ppendix]j Mq eypad	‘0’ and ‘6’	‘2’ and ‘4’	‘4’ and ‘0’	‘3’ AND ‘E’
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

NAK Character

z his|setting|specifies|an|g yi oo|character|or|hex|value|to|be|used|as|thelt g q |character|g yi oo|characters|or|any|hex|value|from|T|to|Tx|l |can|be|selected|R

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option j ata0h its has been set as 7 Data Bits.

z o\set\this\feature'

URdj eterminethedesiredcharacterdorvalueR

VR ' setthe ^g yi oo'i hart ^on the ^inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character value?

WR mo#to#page#YT#and#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz #vx u mx gs s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter# vrogramming#s ode#

XRDycanDtheDbarcode'Dykr ki z Dt g q Di n g x gi z kx Dykz z ot mR

YDycan the appropriate two alpha numeric characters from the keypading ppendixj q eyq pad that represent the desired character value in step above z helsecond character will cause a two beep indication

Bycan the k t z k x Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j k barcode to exit v programming d s ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able W T for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 30. NAK Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Character/Value2	Hex equivalent from gy i oo0i hart	NAK $ @ >0x15 0x24 0x40 0x3E
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters Fromg ppendix0j 0q eypad	'1' and '5'	'2' and '4'	'4' and '0'	'3' AND 'E'
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ACK NAK Timeout Value

z hisoptionspecifies the amount of time the reader waits for and i q character from the host following label transmission z h selectionable timeout Orange is VTT milliseconds to UYPTTmsLUY seconds in VTTms increments g selection of T disables the timeout
z oDsetDthisDvalue

URdj eterminethedesiredsettinginmillisecondsR
VRIj ividethedesiredsettingbyVTTILsettingdisdinVTTmsincrementsMDv adtheresultwithleadingzeroestoyieldtwodigitsM orexampleDTcDTTPYcDTYPVTlcIVTPetck
WR mo@to#page#YUDand#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx g s s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter] vrogramming#s ode#
XRDycantheObarcode‘Dykr ki z Dgi q Dt g q Dz os ku ' z D“ gr ' kDykzz z ot mR
Yr ycan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indication after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

bycanthekt z kx Sk" oz vx u mx g s s ot mls u j k barcodetoexitvrogrammings ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able WU for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 31. ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	200ms 1,000ms (1 sec.) 5200ms (5.2 sec.) 15,000ms (15 sec.)
2 Divide by 200	01 05 26	75
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	'0' and '1'	'0' and '5'	'2' and '6'
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ACK NAK Retry Count

z his|feature|specifies|the|number|of|times|the|reader|retries|all|label|transmission|due|to|a|retry|condition|z he|selectable|range|is|from|U|to|VYX|retries|g |selection|of|T|disables|the|count|and|a|selection|of|VYY|specifies|unlimited|retries

z o\set\this\feature

UROj eterminethedesiredsettingR

Vrdadthenumberwithleadingzeroestolyieldthreedigits01 orexample'VTcTTTPOYbcMTTPDVTcDTVTPDetcR

WR mo?to?page!YUDand#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx gs s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter# vrogramming#s ode#

XHycantheBarcode‘Dykr ki z Dgi q Dt g q Dx kz x—Di u ’ t z Dykz z ot mR

Y can the appropriate three digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the number which was determined in the steps above—ou will hear two beep indication after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Rbycanthe0kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j kDbarcodetoexitDvrogrammings ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able WV for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 32. ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	Disable Retry Count	3 Retries 54 Retries Unlimited Retries
2 Pad with leading zero(es)	000 003 054 255
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING
5	Scan Three Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’	‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Disable Character

ypecifiesthevalueoftheix yVWWhostcommandusedtodisablethereader

gyi oo|characters|or|any|hex|value|from|T|to|Tx|1 |can|be|selected|

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option j ata\hhits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

z o|set|the|value'

UR j etermine the desired character value g setting of Tx1 l indicates the j is able i harac Q ter dis not dused D not available MR

VR ' setthe|gyi ooli hart|on|the|inside|back|cover|of|this|manual|to|find|the|hex|equivalent| for|the|desired|character}svalue

WR mo@to#page#YWDand#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz #vx u mx g s s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter# vrogramming#s ode#

XRDycanDtheDbarcode‘Dykrki z Dj oyghr kDi n gx gi z kx Dykzz ot mR

Yocantheappropriatetwoalpha#numericch aractersfromthekeypadinlg ppendixj q eyq padthatrepresentthedesiredcharactersvalueinstepUUaboveHz helsecondcharacterwill causeaaltwo@beepindication?

Rycan the kt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx g s s ot mls u j k]barcode[to]exit[vrogramming] s ode[k

z his completes the procedure yee z able WWW for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 33. Disable Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired character/value2	Hex equivalent from gy i ooj i hart	‘d’ ’’ ‘D’0x64 0x7D	0x44 0xFF		Disable Command Not Used
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘6’ and ‘4’	‘7’ and ‘D’	‘4’ and ‘4’	‘F’ AND ‘F’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Enable Character

ypecifiesthevalueofthedx yQVWVhostcommandusedtoenablethereader

gyi oocharactersoranyhexvaluefromTTtoTx1 canbeselected

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option j ata0h its has been set as 7 Data Bits.

z o\set\this\feature'

j etermine the desired character value g setting off Tx1 indicates the knable i character is not used not available

URDj eterminethedesiredcharacterDorDvalueR

VR ' setthe gy i ooli hart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character value

WR mo!to!page!YW!and!scan!the!kt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx g s s ot m]s u j k!barcode!to!enter! vrogramming!s ode!

XRDycantheObarcode‘Dykrki z Dkt ghrkDin gxgi z kxDykzz z ot mR

YDycan the appropriate two alpha numeric characters from the keypad in g ppendix j q ey q pad that represent the desired character s value in step JV above z helsecond character will cause la two beep indication

Bycanthekt z kx Sk" oz Dvx umxgs s ot mls u j kDbarcodeToExitVrogrammingD s odeK

z his completes the procedure yee z able WX for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 34. Enable Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired character/value2	Hex equivalent from gy i oo0i hart	‘e’ }’ ‘E’0x65 0x7D	0x45 0xFF		Enable Command Not Used
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters Fromg ppendix0j 0q eypad	‘6’ and ‘5’	‘7’ and ‘D’	‘4’ and ‘5’	‘F’ AND ‘F’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Keyboard Interface

Wedge Quiet Interval

pecifics the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host z herange is from T to ^ Tms in UTms increments

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

URDj etermine the desired setting in milliseconds

VDDj divide the desired setting by OUTLsetting disin OUTms increments KIDv add the result with leadQ ing zeroes to yield two digits RDI or example 'DTc DTTPDYc DTYPDVTc DVTPDetc

WR mo[to]page Vbandiscandtheikt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx gs s ot mls u j kbarcode[to]enter] vrogOs odek

Xrycanthebarcode‘Dykr ki z D kj mkDw’ okz Dot z kx “gr Dykzz ot mR

Yr ycan{the}appropriate{two}digits{from{the}keypad{in}g ppendix{j }q eypad{that}represent{ the}duration{which}was{determined{in{the}steps{above}{ou}will{hear}{two}beep{indica}tion{after{the}last{character}k

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Dycanthekt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j kJbarcodetoJexitR

z his completes the procedure to set the edge w uiet on tervall yee z able WY for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 35. Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	10ms 150ms	600ms 850ms
2 Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes)	01 15 60	85
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING
5 Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘0’ and ‘1’	‘1’ and ‘5’	‘6’ and ‘0’	‘8’ and ‘5’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Intercharacter Delay

z his|parameter|specifies|the|intercharacter|delay between|the|end|of|one|character|and|the|beginning|of|the|next|z heldelay|can|belset|within|a|range|of|zero|LT|to|^T|milliseconds|in|UTms|increments|g |setting|of|zero|specifies|no|delay|

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

z o\set\the\delay'

UNDj etermine the desired setting in milliseconds

VR Dj ivide the desired setting by OUTLsetting disin OUTms increments RDv ad the result with leadQ ing zeroes to yield two digits OR or example 'T0cDTPD0cDTYPEVTDcVTPdetcR

WR mo10pageW and1scantheikt z kx Sk" oz Ivx u mx gs s ot mls u j kIbarcode1toenterV programming's odeR

XRDycanthebarcode‘Dykr ki z Dot z kxi n gx gi z kx Dj kr g—Dykzz ot mR

Yr ycan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indica tion after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Rbycancthe k t z k x Sk" oz Dv x u mx g s s ot mds u j k barcode to exit v programming s ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able W for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 36. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		50ms 150ms	600ms 850ms
2	Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two-digits)	05 15 60 85
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj Mq eypad	‘0’ and ‘5’	‘1’ and ‘5’	‘6’ and ‘0’	‘8’ and ‘5’
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Intercode Delay

pecifics the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface z h selectionable range for this feature is from T to ^ seconds

1 allow these instructions to set this feature

URDJ etermine the desired setting

VRv addtheNumberwithleadingzeroes todayyieldtwodigits01 orexample 'TTcITTPOYcITYPVTbCVTPetc

WR mo[to]page X[and]scan[the]kt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx gs s ot mls u j k[kbarcode][to]enter] vrogramming[s ode]

XRDycandthe?barcode‘Dykr ki z Dot z kxi u j kDj kr g—Dykzz ot mR

Yr ycan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indica tion after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Bycanthekt z kx Sk" oz lvx u mx gs s ot mls u j kJbarcodetoExitvrogrammings ode

z his?completes?the?procedure?yee?z able?W[?for?some?examples?of?how?to?set?this?feature?

Table 37. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	No Delay 5 Seconds 60 Seconds 99 Seconds
2 Pad with leading zero(es)	00 05 60	99
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’ and ‘5’	‘6’ and ‘0’
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Symbologies

Decoding Level

j encodingr evels|are|used|to|configure|a|barcode|SYMBOLG|decoder|to|belvery|aggressive|to|very|conservative|depending|on|a|particular|customer's|needs|

• Level 1 results in a very conservative decoder at the expense of not being able to read poorly printed or damaged labels
• Level 5 results in a very aggressive decoder. z hisaggressivebehaviorallowsdecodingofpoorlyprintedanddamagedlabelsattheexpenseofincreasingthelikelihoodofdecodingerrors
• Level 3, which is the default setting allows the majority of product labels to be decoded

z here|are|many|factors|that|determine|when|to|change|the|decoding|level|for|a|particular| symbology|z hese|factors|include|spots|voids|non|uniform|bar|space|widths|damaged|labels|etc|that|maybe|experienced|in|some|barcode|labels|of|there|are|many|hard|to|read|or|damaged|labels|that|cannot|be| decoded|using|a|conservative|setting|increase|the|decoding|level|to|be|more|aggressive|of|the|majority|of|labels|are|very|good|quality|labels|or|there|is|a|need|to|decrease|the|possibility|of|a|decoder|error|lower|the|decoding|level|to|a|more|conservative|level

Set Length

rength ^i ontroll allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the specified symbology

Variable Length.1 or variable length decoding minimum and maximum length may be set

Fixed Length. 1 or fixed length decoding two different lengths may be set

Set Length 1

z hisfeaturespecifiesoneofthebarcodelengthsforrengthiontrolOrengthUistheminimumlabellengthifin"ariablerengthIsodeForthefirstfixedlengthifinlixedrengthIsodeRengthincludesthebarcode'sdatacharactersonly

z he-numberofcharactersthatcanbelsetvariesdependingontheSYMBOLOxyferencethepageforyourselectedSYMBOLYtoseelspecificvariables

URj determine the desired character length varies depending on symbology and the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits or example 'DTcTTPYdCITYIVTicNTPetcR

VrmoltotheIyetErengthpageforyourselectedsymbologyandscantheikt z kx Sk" oz Ivx u Q mxgs s ot mls u j kbarcodetoentervrogrammings ode

WRDycanthebarcodetoykr ki z Dr kt mz n DUpykz z ot mfordyourselectedsymbologyR

X can the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indi cation after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

YRbycandtheOkt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mJs u j kDbarcodeToDexitDvrogDs odeR

Set Length 2

z hisfeatureallowsyoutosetoneofthebarcodelengthsforthelspecifiedsymbologyforengthV0isthemaximumlabellengthifin"ariablerengthsodeforthesecondfixedlengthifinlixedrengthsodeyeethepageforthelspecificsymbologyforparameters

z he\lengththat\can\be\set\varies\depending\on\the\symbology\kg\setting\of\TT\specifies\to\ignore\this\length\only\one\fixed\length\K

1 allow these instructions to set this feature

UR j etermine the desired character length from U to YTD—for TO to ignore this length and the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits or example OTc OTTPDc DTYPWTc IVTP etc

Vrmo to the yetr engthlpage for your selected symbology and scan the kt z kx Sk" oz lvx u Q mx gs s ot mls u j kJ barcode to enter vrogramming is ode

WRDycantheObarcodeOtoYkr ki z Dr kt mz n DVykz z ot mDforDyourDselectedDsymbolologyR

Xr ycan[the]appropriate[two]digits[from]the|keypad[ing]ppendix[j] q eypad[that]represent[the]length[setting]which[was]determined[in]theteps[above]-ouwill[hear]a[two]beep[indi]cation[after]the[last]character

If you make a mistake, before the last character scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

YRycanthekt z kx Sk" oz vx u mx g s s ot mbs u j k barcode to exit v programming s ode

z his ^D completes ^D the ^D procedure ^R

Data Editing

CAUTION

It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.

hen[a]barcode|is|scanned|additional|information|can|belsent|to|the|host|computer|along|with|the|barcode|data|z his|combination|of|barcode|data|and|supplementary|user|defined|data|is called|a|“message|string|”|z helj ata|k diting|features|can|be|used|to|build|specific|user|defined|data|into|a|message|string|

z here|are|several|types|of|selectable|data|characters|that|can|be|sent|before|and|after|scanned|data||—ou|can|specify|if|they|should|be|sent|with|all|symbologies|nor|only|with|specific|symbologies||igure|U |shows|the|available|elements|you|can|add|to|a|message|string'

Figure 16. Breakdown of a Message String

graph TD
    A["LabelTID Transmission"] --> B["Enable thisToptionTo transmittheLabelTIDYou configure for theScanned Symbolgyn"]
    B --> C["ORnnn"]
    D["Prefix"] --> E["LabelTID"]
    E --> F["AIMTID"]
    F --> G["BarCodeData"]
    G --> H["LabelTID"]
    H --> I["Suffix"]
    I --> J["ppTm t pCharactersIf ASCIIg"]
    J --> K["AIMTID: This function is used to identify and display the common label identifier for its Symbolgyn When enabled this TIDcode will be transmitted before the scanned bar code datan"]

Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced formatting features in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact Technical Support (described on page) for more information.

Please Keep In Mind...

• Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a sophistiQ catedfeatureallowinghighlycustomizableoutputforadvancedusersQ1actorydefaultsetQ tingsfordataeditingistypicallysettoItutkR
• A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology reference i ode yelection starting on page OUT [Moracross all symbologies set via the global features in this chapter]
• You can add any character from the g yi oo'i hart'LfromITTQ1 1 MontheinsideBackcoverOf thismanualasdaprefixDssuffixDorr abelDoj R
• Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output

Global Prefix/Suffix

' pitoVTg yi oocharactersmaybeaddedaslaprefixLinlapositionbeforethebarcodedataandorasalsuffixLinlapositionfollowingthebarcodedataasindicatedinl igureU[R

Figure 17. Prefix and Suffix Positions

graph TD
    A["ORnnn"] --> B["LabelID"]
    B --> C["AIMID"]
    C --> D["BarCodeData"]
    D --> E["LabelID"]
    E --> F["Suffix"]
    G["Prefix"] --> H["ppIn1 pICharactersTASCIIg"]
    I["AND OR"] --> J["OR"]

Example: Setting a Prefix

on this example we'll set a prefix for all symbologies

URj eterminewhichg yi oocharacterlsdaretobeaddedtoscannedbarcodedataDonthisexampleWe'lladdaoddollarsignDL'H'lasdaprefix?
VR mo#to#page[ band#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz #vx u mx gs s ot m#s u j k#barcode]

WRDycanDtheDykz Dmr u hgr Dvx k1 o" DbarcodeR

XR x eference the gy i oo'i hart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex value assigned to the desired character he corresponding hex number for the 'H' character is VXz olenter this selection code scan the 'V' and 'X' barcodes from g ppendix j q eypad

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Yr of less than the expected string of VT characters are selected scan the kt z kx Sk" oz 3bar code to terminate the string

Bycanthekt z kx Sk" oz barcode once again to exit vrogrammings ode

[ Rz he resulting message string would appear as follows

ycannedbarcodedata12345

x esultingmessagestringoutput\$12345

Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.

g os |label|identifiers|las|opposed|to|custom|characters|you|select|yourself|as|with|label|identifiers|can|be|included|with|scanned|barcode|data|g os |label|identifiers|consist|of|three|characters|as|follows'

• A close brace character (ASCII ']), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifier characterdissymboldependentMR)

SYMBOLOGY CHAR	SYMBOLOGY CHAR
UPC/EAN	E^a	Code 128/GS1-128 C
Code 39 and Code 32	A	DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded	e
Codabar	F	Standard 2 of 5	S
Interleaved 2 of 5 I ISBN			x^b
Code 93	G	Code 11	H

a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs. b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 18. AIM ID

graph TD
    A["LabelID"] --> B["AIMID"]
    B --> C["CodeData"]
    C --> D["LabelID"]
    C --> E["Suffix"]

Label ID

g dr abelDoj disda customizablecodeofduptothreegyi oo0charactersLeachcanbeoneofhexTxTUQ Tx1 MPusedtoIdentifyabarcodeLsymbologyTypeMotcanbeappendedprevioustoorfollowing thetransmittedbarcodedatadependinguponhowthisoptiondisenabledz hisfeatureprovides optionsforconfiguringcustomr abelDoj slasda preloadedsetLseeFr abelDoj 'vreloadedyetsFD belowIndividuallyperlsymbologyLseeFr abelDoj 'yetlondividuallyveryymbologyFon pageWT^RDofyouwishtoprogramthereadertolalwaysincludeanindustrystandardlabelD identifierforgr r LsymbologytypesPseeFmlobalg os Doj Fonpage[ ^R

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets

z he\reader\supports\two\pre\loaded\sets\lofr abelloj sRiz ableW shows the' yg\land\the2k' sets R

CAUTION

When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

Table 38. Label ID Pre-loaded Sets

Symbology	USA Label ID set EU Label ID set
	ASCII character	Hexidecimal value	ASCII character	Hexidecimal value
ABC Codabar	S 530000	S 530000
Anker Plessey	o 6F0000	o 6F0000
CODABAR	% 250000	R 520000
Codablock F	I 6C0000	m 6D0000
CODE11	CE 434500	b 620000
CODE128	# 230000	T 540000
CODE32	A 410000	X 580000
CODE39	* 2A0000	V 560000
CODE39 CIP	Y 590000	Y 590000
CODE4	4 340000	4 340000
CODE5	j 6A0000	j 6A0000
CODE93	&	260000	U	550000
DATALOGIC 2OF5	s	730000	s	730000
EAN13	F 460000	B 420000
EAN13 P2	F 460000	L 4C0000
EAN13 P5	F 460000	M 4D0000
EAN13 P8	F 460000	# 230000
Symbology USA Label ID	set EU Label ID set
	ASCII character	Hexidecimal value	ASCII character	Hexidecimal value
EAN8	FF 464600	A 410000
EAN8 P2	FF 464600	J 4A0000
EAN8 P5	FF 464600	K 4B0000
EAN8 P8	FF 464600	* 2A0000
FOLLETT 2OF5	O 4F0000	O 4F0000
GS1 DATABAR EXPANDED	RX 525800	t 740000
GS1 DATABAR LIMITED	RL 524C00	v 760000
GS1 DATABAR OMNIDIRECTIONAL	R4 523400	u 750000
GS1-128		000000 k 6B0000
GTIN	G 470000	A 244100
GTIN2	G2 473200	B 244200
GTIN5	G5 473500	C 244300
GTIN8	G8 473800	D 244400
IATA	IA 494100	& 260000
Industrial 2 of 5	W 570000	W 570000
Interleaved 2 of 5	i	690000 N 4E0000
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR	e	650000	e	650000
ISBN	l	490000	@	400000
ISBT128	f	660000	f	660000
ISSN	n	6E0000	n	6E0000
MSI	@ 400000	Z 5A0000
Plessey	a	610000	a	610000
S25	s	730000	P	500000
UPCA	A	410000 C 430000
UPCA P2	A	410000	F	460000
UPCA P5	A	410000 G 470000
UPCA P8	A	410000	Q	510000

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology

z oconfigureabr abelloj ñindividuallyforalsinglesymbology

UR moDtoDpageUBandDscanDtheDkt z kx Sk" oz Dbarcode

V^R yelectr abelDoj position as either hkl u x kLknableas v refixMorg1 z kx Lknableas sufQ fixMbyscanningthe appropriate barcode in the section Fr abelDoj i ontrolfonpage VRD x eference l igureU^forr abelDoj positioning options if multiple identification features are enabled R
WRycana|a|barcode|to|select|the|symbology|for|which|you|wish|to|configure|a|custom|r abel|oj |from|the|section|Fr abel|oj |yymbology|yelectionFon|page| WR
XRDj etermine the desired character lsADlyou may choose up to three AD which will represent the r abeloj for the selected symbology
YR z urntotheg yi oo'i hartontheinsidebackcoverofthismanualandfindtheequivalenthexdigitsassociatedwithyourchoiceofr abelloj 0l orexampleifyouwishtoselectandequalsignLcDaslaDr abelloj thechartindicatesbitsassociatedhexcharactersdasWj 0z urntoq eypadstartingonpageWYUandscanthebarcodesrepresentingthehexcharactersdeterQ mined0l ortheexamplegiventhecharacters'W'and'j 'wouldbe scannedos oreexamplesofr abelloj settingsareprovidedinz ableW^R

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Dycanthekt z kx Sk" oz DbarcodetoExitr abelDoj DentryR

[Ocyanthekt z kx Sk” oz barcodeonceagaintolexitvrogrammings oder z hiscompletesthestepstoconfigurear abeldoj foralgivensymbology]

Figure 19. Label ID Position Options

graph TD
    A["Prefix"] --> B["LabelIID"]
    B --> C["AimIID"]
    C --> D["BarCodeData"]
    D --> E["LabelIID"]
    E --> F["Suffix"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    linkStyle 0 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 1 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 2 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 3 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 4 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 5 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 6 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 7 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 8 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 9 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 10 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 11 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 12 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 13 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 14 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 15 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 16 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 17 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 18 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 19 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 20 stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px

Table 39. Label ID Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode		(Scanner enters Programming Mode)
2.	Determine placement of the Label ID characters BEFORE or AFTER with regard to scanned data using r abelloj i ontrol@startinglonpage# V	Enable as Prefix	Enable as Suffix	Enable as Prefix	Enable as Suffix
3.	Scan the barcode selecting the symbology type you wish to designate label ID characters for using r abelloj #ymbology yelection@startinglonpage# V	DataBar Omnidirectional	Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 32
4.	Custom Label ID example (desired characters):	D B *=C3 + P H
5.	Find hex equivalents from the g yi oo#i hart (inside back cover), then scan in these digits/characters using the barcodes in the section: q eypad@ startinglonpageWYU If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.	44 42 2A	3D 43 33	2B	50 48
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode		(Scanner exits Label ID entry)
7.	Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode once again	(Scanner exits Programming Mode)
Result:		DB*[barcode data]	[barcode data]=C3	+[barcode data]	[barcode data]PH

Character Conversion

i character conversiondisan eight byte configurationitem dz he eight bytes are X character pairs represented in hexadecimal gy i oo values dz he first character in the pair is the character that will be converted dz he second character in the pair is the character to convert to of the character to convert in da pair disl 1 then no conversion is done

1 or example?if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the following * XUXVWUWVI 1111111
z he\first\pair\is\DXUV\org h\DLXUDhex\dis\ang yi oo\capital\g POXV\hex\dis\ang yi oo\capital\h\and\the\second\pair\is\WUWV\or\OUVDLWUChex\dis\ang yi oo\UPDW\dis\ang yi oo\VRRz he\other\two\pairs\arel1111\dand\ll111R

iththelabelP0g h UVh g VUPit would look as follows after the character conversion 'Oh h VWh h VVR

z help [characters]were converted to [characters]and the [U]characters]were converted to [U]characters; othing is done with the last two character pairs since they are all 1 R
z o ^D set ^D i character ^D i onversion'

UR moltopage^T and scan the kt z kx Sk” oz Dbarcode
VDDycandthe“i onfigureDi caracterDi onversion”Dbarcode
WRO determine the desired string yixteen positions must be determined as in the above exam plus extturn to the gy i ooli hart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string
XR z urnto@g ppendixj PQ eypadandscanthebarcodesrepresentingthehexcharactersdeterQ minedinthepreviousstepR
YRycandthekt z kx Sk" oz ObarcodetoExitvrogrammings odeR

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

Reading Parameters

Label Gone Timeout

z his|feature|sets|the|time|after|the|last|label|segment|seen|before|the|reader|prepares|for|a|new|label|z he|timeout|can|bel|set|within|a|range|of|UT|m milliseconds|to|VPYYT|m milliseconds|LVRYYt seconds|Din|UTms|increments|r abel|mone|z imeout|does|not|apply|to|scan|modes|that|require|a| trigger|pull|for|each|label|that|isread

I allow these instructions to set this feature

UNDj etermine the desired setting in milliseconds

VDDj ivide the desired setting by OUTLsetting dis in OUTms increments RDv ad the result with leadQ ing zeroes to yield three digits RD or example DTc TTTTPDc CTTYPDTCd VTPetc

WR mo10page^Wand|scan|the|kt z kx Sk" oz |vx u mx g s s ot mls u j k|barcode|to|enter|vrogramming|s odeR

XRDycantheObarcode‘Dykr ki z Drg hkr Dmu t kDz os ku’ z Dykzz ot mR

Ybycantheappropriatethreealpha(numeric) charactersfromthekeypadingppendixj pq eypadrepresentingthedurationwhichwasdeterminedinthestepsaboveoutwillhearaltwo(beep)indicationafterthelastcharacter

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Rbycanthek t z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j kDbarcodetoexitDvrogrammingD s odeR

z his completes the procedure yee z able X T for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 40. Timeout Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		50ms 150ms	1800ms (1.8 sec.)	2550ms (2.55 sec.)
2	Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes)	005 015 180	255
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING
5	Scan Three Characters From g ppendixj Mq eypad	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’	‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’	‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’	‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Good Read LED Duration

z hisfeaturespecifiestheamountoftimethattheimoodx eaddr kj remainslonfollowingalgoodreadzhegoodreadrkj lontimecanbelsetwithinalrangeofUTmillisecondstoIVYYT millisecondsLTITTUtoIVYYsecondsDinUTTmsIncrementsk

1 allow these instructions to set this feature

URj determine the desired setting in milliseconds g setting of time means that the good read rkj stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled
VR j ividethedesiredsettingbyOUTLsettingdisDinDUTTmsIncrementsRdVadtheresultWwithDleadQingzeroesDtoYieldthreedigitsRdI orexampleDTcDTTTPYDcDTTTPDvTDcDTVTPdetcR
WR mo!to!page!UTT!and!scan!the!kt z kx Sk" oz Ivx u mx g s s ot m!s u j k!barcode!to! enter!vrogramming!s ode!
XRDycantheDbarcode'Dykr ki z Dmu u j Dx kgj Dr kj Dj ' x gz ou t Dykz z ot mR
Yr ycan the appropriate three digits from the keypad ppendix j q eypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear two bee indica tion after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Dycanthekt z kx Sk" oz vx u mx gs s ot mls u j k barcodetoexitvrogrammings ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able XU for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 41. Good Read LED Duration Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		Good Read LED stays on until next trigger pull (00)	20ms 150ms	2550ms (2.55 sec.)
2	Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes)	000 002 015 255
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING
5	Scan Three Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’	‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’	‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Scanning Features

Scan Mode

z hismodeislassociatedwithtypicalhandheldreaderoperationyelectsthescanoperatingmodelforthereaderHzhefollowingselectionsarevalidforallmodels'

Trigger Single. then the trigger is pulled Scanning is activated until done of the following occurs

Qy canningg ctivez imehaselapsed

QaDlabelDhasDbeenDread

QtheDtriggerDisDreleased

Trigger Hold Multiple. hen the trigger is pulled scanning starts and the product scans until the trigger is released by canning g ctive z ime has elapsed x eading a label does not disable scanning j ouble x ead z imeout prevent undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode

Trigger Pulse Multiple. hen the trigger is pulled continuous scanning is activated until y canning g ctive z ime has elapsed or the trigger has been released and pulled again j ouble x ead z ime out prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode

Flashing. z he reader flashe son and off regardless of the trigger status lashrate is controlled by lashu niz ime and lashu ffz ime hen lashislu t the imager reads continuously when lashislu 11 scanning is deactivated

Flashing is the recommended scan mode for Gryphon L hands-free (stand mode) of operation

Always On. t o trigger pull dis required to read a barcode y canning is continually on of the trigger is pulled the reader acts as if it is in z rigger yingle is ode j ouble x ead z imeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this model

z he\following\two\features\are\valid\only\for\the\mryphon\r desk\and\mobile\pp\but\not\the\mryphon\r aser\model\yee\Fr aser\l eaturesFon\page\V [ for specific\parameters\for\their aser\ model

Stand Mode. t o trigger pull is required to read a barcode by canning is turned on automatically when an item is placed in the reader's field of view of the trigger is pulled the reader acts as if it in single read mode j ouble x ead z imeout prevent undesired multiple reads while in this mode

Trigger Object Sense. z his|mode|is|similar|tolytand|s ode|except|that|altrigger|pull|is|required|to|activate|the|decoder|

URDi ontrolledByl lashDu nDz imeR

Scanning Active Time

z hissettingspecifiestheamountoftimethatthereaderstaysdinscandu t stateoncethestateisenteredhz herangeforthissettingisfromUJtoVYYsecondsdinUQsecondIncrements

I allow these instructions to set this feature

URDJ etermine the desired setting

Vrdv addthe result with leading zeroes to yield three digits or example 'TTc OTTTPOYc OTTYPVTD cOTVTRetck

WR mo@to#pageUTXand#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter#vrogramming#s ode#

XRDycantheObarcode‘Dykrki z Dyi g t t ot mDg i z o“ kDz os kDykzz z ot mR

Yr ycan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indication after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Bycanthekt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx g s s ot mls u j k]barcode[to]exit[vrogramming]s ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able XV for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 42. Scanning Active Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	1 Second	90 Sec. (1.5 min.)	180 Sec. (3 min.)	255 Seconds (4.25 min.)
2 Pad leading zero(es)	001 090 180		255
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING
5	Scan Three Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’	‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’	‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Flash On Time

z hisfeaturespecifiestheu t timefortheindicatorrkj whileinl lashs ode0z heselectablerangeisUTTto|^P^TTmillisecondsLTRUto|^R^secondsMPinUTTmillisecondIncrements

I allow these instructions to set this feature

URj etermine the desired setting in milliseconds

VR Dj ivide the desired setting by UTTDL setting dis in UTTms increments MRv ad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits or example DTcDTTPYcDTYPNTDcWTPetcR

WR moJtoJpageJUTYandJscanJtheJkt z kx Sk" oz Jvx u mx g s s ot mds u j kJbarcodeJtoJ enterJvrogrammingJs odeK

Xrycanthebarcode‘Dykr ki z dl rgyn Du t Dz os kDykz z ot mk

Ybcan{the}appropriate{two}digits{from{the}keypad{ing ppendix}j {pq} eypad{representing{the}duration{which}was{determined{in{the}steps{above}k—ou{will{hear}{a}two{beep{indication}after{the}last{character}}

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Rbycanthekt z kx Sk" oz Dvx umx g s s ot mls u j k barcodetoexitvrogrammings ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able IXV for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 43. Flash On Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		500ms	1,000ms (1 sec.)	5200ms (5.2 sec.)	9,900ms (9.9 sec.)
2	Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits)	05 10 52 99
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj Mq eypad	‘0’ and ‘5’	‘1’ and ‘0’	‘5’ and ‘2’	‘9’ and ‘9’
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Flash Off Time

z hisfeaturespecifiesthe11 [time]fortheindicatorrkj [whilein] lashs odeHz he selectable rangeDisUTTto^P^TTmillisecondsLTRUto^R^secondsMPDinUTTmillisecondIncrements

1 allow these instructions to set this feature

URDj etermine the desired setting in milliseconds

VRIj ividethedesiredsettingbyUTTILsettingdisdinUTTmsIncrementsMDv adtheresultwithleadingzeroestoyieldtwodigitsDI orexampleDTDcDTPDYcDTYPNVTdCIVTPdetck

WR mo@to@page!UTYand&scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter#vrogramming#s ode#

XRDycantheDbarcode‘Dykr ki z Dl rgyn Du ll Dz os kDykzz ot mR

Yr ycan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indica tion after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Bycanthekt z kx Sk" oz [vx u mx g s s ot mls u j k]barcode[to]exit[vrogramming]s ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able XX for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 44. Flash Off Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting		500ms	1,000ms (1 sec.)	5200ms (5.2 sec.)	9,900ms (9.9 sec.)
2	Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits)	05 10 52 99
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj Mq eypad	‘0’ and ‘5’	‘1’ and ‘0’	‘5’ and ‘2’	‘9’ and ‘9’
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Display Settings

Display Mode

z he\user\can\control\the\reader\display\behavior\according\to\the\following\selections'

Local Echo mode: henbabarcodeisreadwiththereader

• z helcodebissenttotheDn ostR
• z heReader@displaydiscleared
- z heCodeBisAlsoSentTotheReaderDisplayLr ocalDkchoMR
- z hel cursor dispositioned after the last printed character on the reader display

Normal mode: hena barcodeisreadwiththereader

• z heCodeIsSenttotheOn ostR
- z he|reader|display|is|not|cleared|z herefore|if|any|previous|data|was|displayed|on|the|reader|screen|it|remains|
• z here!dis?no?r ocal?k cho?to?the?reader?display?

Clear Display After Decode mode: hen\a\barcode\is\read\with\the\reader

• z heCodeDissenttotheIn ostR
- z he!reader!display!dis!cleared!z herefore!if?any!previous!data!was!displayed!on!the!reader!screen!it!is!cancelled!and!the!screen!remains!blank!
- z here!dis!no!r ocal!k cho!of!the!code!to!the!reader!display!

n ost messages sent to the reader are always written to the reader display

RF Features

Configuration Update

Automatic Configuration Update

hen(this)featureisenabledthe(basestationandreaderwillkeeptheirconfigurations) synchronizedofalreaderisconfigurationisalteredbyreadingprogramminglabelsthischangeis automaticallytransferredandupdatedinallinkedbasestationorikewiseifthebasestations configurationischangedusinglg laddinorbyhostcommandsthenthereaderisconfiguration willautomaticallybeupdatedifthisfeatureisenabledR

RF Address Stamping

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

z his|option|specifies|the|delimiter|character|to|be|placed|between|the|label|data|and|radio|address|when|address|stamping|is|enabled|

This feature only applies if [yource] x adio g ddress z ransmissionFon page[V] Tis enabled.

I allow these instructions to select the delimiter character

UR j etermine the desired character then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the g yi oo fi hart on the inside back cover g setting of TT specifies no delimiter character
VR mo#to#page#V[ U#and#scan#the#kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot m#s u j k#barcode#to#enter#vrogramming#s ode#

WRDycantheDbarcode‘Dykz Dyu’ xi kDx gj ou Dgj j x kyyDj kros oz kxDi n gxgi z kxR

Xr ycan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the hexadecimal characters which were determined the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indication after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

YRdycanthe0kt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j kJbarcodetojexitvrogrammings odeI

z his!completes!the!procedure!yee!z able!XY!for!some!examples!of!how!to!set!this!feature!

Table 45. Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	No delimiter character	, (comma) - (dash) / (slash)
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER
4	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj q eypad	‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘2’ and ‘C’	‘2’ and ‘D’	‘2’ AND ‘F’
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

z his|parameter|sets|the|valid|wait|time|before|transmission|between|the|handheld|reader|and|h ase|ytation|is|considered|failed|

hensetting this parameter take into consideration the radio traffic number of readers in the same area MDz he selectable range for this feature is from TV to VY seconds

I allow these instructions to set this feature

URdj eterminethedesiredsetting

VDDadthenumberwithleadingzeroestoyieldtwodigits01 orexample'VDCVTVPYDCTYPDVYDC)VYDetc

WR mo10pageIV[Vandscanycanthetkt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mls u j k barcode to] entervrogramming's ode

Xycanthebarcode‘Dykr ki z Dx gj ou Dvx u z u i u r Dzos ku’ z R

Yr ycan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above -ou will hear a two beep indica tion after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Rbycanthekt z kx Sk" oz Dvx u mx g s s ot mds u j k barcodetoexitvrogrammings ode

z his completes the procedure yee z able IX for some examples of how to set this feature

Table 46. STAR Radio Protocol Timeout Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1 Desired Setting	2 Seconds 5 Seconds	25 Seconds
2 Pad with leading zero(es)	02 05 10	25
3	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4	Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING
5	Scan Two Characters From g ppendixj Mq eypad	‘0’ and ‘2’	‘0’ and ‘5’	‘1’ and ‘0’
6	Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

BT-Only Features

BT Pin Code

z hisoptionspecifiesthepincodeLeitherXQorU (characterstobeusedforauthenticationof) thehzlink
z osettheDpinDcode'

Udycanthekt z kx Sk" oz vx u mx gs s ot mls u j kbarcodetoentervrogrammings odethenenableFhz ysecuritys odeFonpageV T0

VtypeifythedesiredpincodelengthLXdorU byscanningtheappropriatebarcodeinD Fyelectlvot Di odeIrengthFlonpageV UR

WRDJ etermine the desired characters or example PJ VYXorz u x UVWXY [ UWYs

XRCi onvertthecharacterstohexadecimalusingthegyi ooii hartontheinsidebackcoverofthismanual

YR mo1to1pageIV U1andDycanthe1bar1code1Dykz IX1ngx1vot Di u j k1dorykz DU Qi ngx1vot Di u j k1

R ycan the appropriate alphanumeric characters from the keypad in g ppendix j q eypad representing the hexadecimal entries determined in the steps above -ou will hear two beep indication after the last character

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

[ Dycanthekt z kx Sk" oz Jvx umxgs s ot mls u j kbarcodetoexitvrogramming] s odeR

Changing the pin code setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting, the Pin Code setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

Table 47. BT Pin Code Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
1	Desired Setting	D254	STOR12345678135M
2	Convert the characters to hexadecimal	44 32 35 34 53	54 4F 52 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 31 33 35 4D
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SET BT PIN CODE
5	Scan 8 or 32 Alphanumeric Characters From g ppendixj Mq eypad	44323534 5354	4F5231323334353637383133354D
6Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

NOTES

Message Formatting

Message Formatting is only available for the Gryphon™ Mobile model.

g \message from the in ost to the basel must follow these rules

• If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base the n ost replay must have address field and delimiter too that wise the message will be ignored g address delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled
• Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the mryphon to especially when more than one handheld is linked to the same base g address stamping could be dis abled if the system is in point to point configuration of address stamping is not enabled the messages are addressed to the first handheld linked to the base
• Messages end with "CR" 0x0D ASCII character ^2 z heli x character cannot be contained in the middle
• Messages cannot start with '\$' or # because these are reserved for Service mode command
• Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/Ignore is set to ognorel
• Message could be sent to the HH in response to a Label when “Transmit mode” require g ckfromn ostlsee transmitmodeparameterMoratanytimehenmessagesaresentnotinresponsetoalabelmuststartwithj i VITxUVg yi oocharacterandcouldbelsentdanytransmitmodesetting
• Message could be sent to all HH linked to base by using a Multicast message: "00 00 00 00 2A AA"
• In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in sleep state

z heformationofthelgi q fromn ostmessageUsedfortransmissionmodeDTVDis

[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE

z helformatlofbalgenericmessagel romln osttoln n dis

[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE

wherej i Vdisg yi ooTxUVDL^x MDcharacterR

[Items in square brackets are optional.]

- If you want to control the Scanner's beeper from the host you will also probably want to disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is received from the craicle Lyee ireless heeper features on page VY^R

• Escape sequences are interpreted as commands.
• Plain text is directly printed on the display. If writing beyond the end of line, the display does not wrap automatically xtr characters are ignored; it is not interpreted like 1 P01 Petc

Cursor Control

ESC [n A Up n rows, no scroll

ESC [n B Down n rows, no scroll

ESC [n C Right n columns

ESC [n D Left n columns

ESC [G] CR

ESC[r;cH Move to row r, column c (ESC[1;1H is the upper left character position of the display)

ESC D Down 1 row, with scroll

ESC E CR and cursor down 1 row with scroll

ESC M Up 1 row and scroll

NOTES:

• Since CR is used as the message terminator?youmustusekyi ?m#orkyi Dk#toprintaD i x RD
• The cursor row position is not affected by the currently selected font. he display always has Xrows so when writing with the large font actually two rows are written to the current rentone and the lone below it—ou will need two key commands to step from one row to the next when using the large font
• The cursor column position is affected by the currently selected font z herefore column disW pixels from the left border only if you last selected the x font otherwise it could be X port [Vpixels from the left border]

Font Selection

ESC [0 m Normal mode

ESC [7 m] Reverse mode

ESC # 4 Large font: subsequent characters are written on the current row and the row below it using the 12x16 font which allows for two rows of eight characters on the display.

ESC # 5 Normal font: subsequent characters are written using the 6x8 font, which allows for four rows of sixteen characters on the display.

ESC #7 Medium font: subsequent characters are written using the 8x8 font, which allows for 4 rows of 12 characters on the display.

Clearing Display

ESC [0 K	From cursor position to end of line inclusive
ESC [1 K	From beginning of line to cursor position (not inclusive)
ESC [2 K	Entire line
ESC [0 J	From cursor position to end of display inclusive
ESC [1 J	From beginning of display to cursor position (not inclusive)
ESC [2 J	Entire display; moves cursor to upper left corner on display

LED and Beeper Control

ESC [0 q	Emit short High tone + short delay
ESC [1 q	Emit short Low tone + short delay
ESC [2 q	Emit long Low tone + short delay
ESC [3 q	Emit good read tone
ESC [4 q	Emit bad tx tone
ESC [5 q	Wait 100 ms
ESC [6 q	Turn on the green LED
ESC [7 q	Turn off the green LED
ESC [8 q	Turn on the green spot
ESC [9 q	Turn off the green spot
ESC [0 r	Beep for Find me function (new)
ESC [1 r	Power-off (new)

z heir kj [control]escapesequences are intended to activate their kj for short periods of time and can be used in combination with the h eeper z heir kj [and h eeper will be controlled by the system after the entire command sequence is interpreted

Example:

ESC [6 q ESC [3 q ESC [7 q] Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns off the green LED.
ESC [6 q ESC [5 q ESC [7 q] Turns on the green LED for 100 ms and then turns off the green LED.

Messages from Scanner Command Keys

z he|mryphon™|series|scanners|with|display|have|command|keys|that|can|each|be|associated|with|a|character|to|send|to|the|host|

hypressing the keys on the scanner the associated character with its relative message formatting is sent to the in ost ol or example keys can be used to select items from a menu sent to the scanner display by the application program

z he messages are handled by the system as if they were barcodes that is why q eyoj can have so many fields appended to it of in your application there is some chance of reading la U char barcode identical to q eyoj the way you can distinguish between the two is to enable the i ode j 'z he q eyoj dis the only U character long kg t D code

z he!default!characters!associated!with!each!key!Lq eyoj !Dare!shown!in!the!following!table!

(left) Key '<'
(center) Key '='
(right) Key '>'

Appendix A

Technical Specifications

z able48containsv hysicalandv erformancei characteristicsD' serkenvironmentandx egulatoryinformationAz able49providesytandardi ableivinoutsR

Table 48. Technical Specifications

Item Description
Physical Characteristics
Color White/Gray	Gray/Gray
Dimensions Height 7.1"/181 mm	Length 3.9"/100 mmWidth 2.8"/71 mm
Weight (without cable) GD 41x0/GD4300: Approximately 6.0 ounces/169 gGM4100/GBT4100: Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 gBC40x0: Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 gBC40x0-CF: Approximately 10.1 ounces/290 g
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage & Current	GD4130 model:5V±5% Input range. 1.9W max.360 mA (max) at 5V2.5 mA RS-232 sleep mode/ USB suspendGD4110 model:4.5÷14V Input range. Power 1.8W max.340 mA (max) at 5V.2.5 mA (RS-232 sleep mode / USB suspend)BC40x0 base:4.75-14V; Input range. Power 8W max^a ;Imax 500mA when in host/bus powered mode^a .	GD4330 model:Input current at 5V±5% = 260 mA (max)2.5 mA (USB suspend)Standby (typical) <= 30mAGD4310 model:Input Power =1.2W max in the 4.5÷14V range2.5 mA (USB suspend)Standby (typical): 30mA @5V (90mA @5V for IBM46xx)BC40x0-CF base:10-14V; Input range. Power 8W max^a ;Imax 800mA .
Battery Type Li-Ion battery pack
Charge time for full charge from full discharge	4 hours with 12v external power supply adapter^b
	Max 22h hours with Host power(In this case no supply adapter is needed) ^b
Item	Description
Operating autonomy(continuous reading)	GM4100: 50,000 reads (typical)GBT4100: 30,000 reads (typical)
Performance Characteristics GD41x0 model: GD43x0 model:
Light Source Dual LEDs 650nm C	ass 2 Laser
Roll (Tilt) Tolerance ± 35° from normal
Pitch Tolerance GD 41x0/GM4100/GBT4100: ± 65°GD4300: ± 50°
Skew (Yaw) Tolerance ± 65°
Field of View 10" (25.4cm) wide at 12.5" (31.8cm)from the reader		Scan Angle: 47° (normal) or 35° (narrow)
Depth of Field (Typical)C (3 mil - 2.9" to 4.7" (7.5cm to 12cm)13 milC - 1.2" to 23.6" (3cm to 60cm)20 mil - 1.2" to 31.5" (3cm to 80cm)		5 mil - 1.4" to 6.22" (3,6cm to 15,8cm)13 milC - 0.87" to 18.7" (2,2cm to 47,5cm)20 mil - up to 27.1" (to 69cm)
Minimum Element Width 3 mil 4 mil
Print Contrast Minimum 15% minimum reflectance
Decode Capability	UPC/EAN/JAN, P2 /P5, ISBN/ISSN; Code 39, Code39 FullASCII; Italian Pharmacode 39, Code39 CIP; Code 128, GS1-128; C128 ISBT; Code 128 addons;l 2 of 5; Standard 2 of 5; I 2 of 5 CIP HR; Industrial 2 of 5; IATA; Datalogic 2 of 5; Follet 2 of 5; Code 11; Plessey, Anker Plessey; Codabar, ABC Codabar ; Code 93; MSI; GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBarTM Limited, GS1 DataBarTM Expanded; Code 4, Code 5; Codablock F, Codablock F EAN;
Interfaces Supportedd	RS-232 Std, RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf, RS-232 OPOS, IBM 46xx (ports 5B and 9B), USB Com Std., USB Keyboard, USB Alternate Keyboard,USB OEM, Keyboard Wedge (AT with or w/o Alternate Key, IBM AT PS2 with or w/o Alternate Key, PC-XT, IBM 3153, IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx,34xx, 37xx make only and make break keyboard, Digital Terminals VT2x, VT3xx, VT4xx, and Apple) and Wand Emulation.
User Environment
Operating Temperature	GD 41x0: 32° to 131° F (0° to 55°C)GM4100/GBT4100/GD4300: 32° to 122° F (0° to 50°C)
Charging Temperature	32° to 104° F (0° to 40°C)
Storage Temperature	-4° to 158° F (-20° to 70°C)
Humidity	Operating: 5% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing
Drop Specifications	18 drops from 1.8 meters (5.9 feet) to concrete
Ambient Light Immunity	Up to 100,000 Lux
Contaminants Spray/Rain/Dust/Particulates	IP52
ESD Level	16 KV
Item Description
Regulatory
Electrical Safety	See the Quick Reference Guide for each specific product for details.
EMI/RFI
Laser Safety
LED class safety

a. Typical input current measured under factory default configuration.
b. Charge Times are much lower when battery is within daily typical operating condition.
c. 13 mils DOF based on EAN. All others are Code 39. All labels grade A, typical environmental light, 20°C, label inclination 10°
d. See "Interface Selection" on page 29 for a listing of available interface sets by model type.

Radio Features	Model
	433MHz model 910 Mhz BT
Working Center Frequency	433.920 MHz	910.000 MHz	2400 to 2483.5 MHz
Range (in open air) 30 m 15 m 30 m
Max. number of devices per base station	16	16	1

Standard Cable Pinouts

Figure 20 and z able49 provide standard pinout information for the h aseylation's interface cable
Figure 20. Standard Cable Pinouts

Bottom of Scanner Pin 10 Pin 1 Interface Cable Port Cable Strain Relief To Host Cable Clip (Latch) Cable

z he|signal|descriptions|inz able|49|apply|to|the|connector|on|the|reader|and|are|for|reference|only

Table 49. Standard Cable Pinouts — Reader Side

Pin RS-232 OEM USB Keyboard Wedge
1 RTS (out)
2 D+	CLKIN (KBD side)
3 D-	DATAIN (KBD side)
4 GND	GND GND GND
5	RX
6	TX
7	VCC	VCC	VCC	VCC
8		IBM_B		CLKOUT (PC side)
9		IBM_A		DATAOUT (PC side)
10	CTS (in)

LED and Beeper Indications

z he|reader's|beeper|sounds|and|its|r kj |illuminates|to|indicate|various|functions|or|errors|on|the|reader|g n|optional|“mreen|ypot”|also|performs|useful|functions|z heltables|below|list|these|indications|u ne|exception|to|the|behaviors|listed|in|the|tables|is|that|the|reader's|functions|are|programmable|and|may|or|may|not|be|turned|on| or|example|certain|indications|such|as|the|power|up|beep|can|be|disabled|using|programming|barcode|labels

Table 50. LED and Beeper Indications

INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER
Power-up Beep The reader is in the process of power-ing-up.			Reader beeps four times at highest frequency and volume upon power-up.
Good Read Beep A label has been successfully scanned by the reader.		LED behavior for this indication is configurable via the feature "Good Read: When to Indicate"	The reader will beep once at current frequency, volume, mono/bi-tonal setting and duration upon a successful label scan.
ROM Failure There is an error in the reader's software/programming		Flashes	Reader sounds one error beep at highest volume.
Limited Scanning Label Read	Indicates that a host connection is not established when the IBM or USB interface is enabled.	N/A	Reader 'chirps' six times at the highest frequency and current volume.
Reader Active Mode	The reader is active and ready to scan.	The LED is lit steadilya	N/A
Reader Disabled	The reader has been disabled by the host.	The LED blinks continuously	N/A
Green Spot is on continuously	While in Stand Mode or Trigger Stand Mode the green spot shall be on while in stand watch state.	N/A N/A
Green Spota flashes momentarily	Upon successful read of a label, the software shall turn the green spot on for the time specified by the configured value.	N/A N/A

a. Except when in sleep mode or when a Good Read LED Duration other than 00 is selected

Table 51. Programming Mode Indications

Programming Mode - The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Programming Mode.
Label Programming Mode Entry	A valid programming label has been scanned.	LED blinks continuously	Reader sounds four low frequency beeps.
Label Programming Mode Rejection of Label	A label has been rejected.	N/A	Reader sounds three times at lowest frequency & current volume.
Label Programming Mode Acceptance of Partial Label	In cases where multiple labels must be scanned to program one feature, this indication acknowledges each portion as it is successfully scanned.	N/A	Reader sounds one short beep at highest frequency & current volume.
Label Programming Mode Acceptance of Programming	Configuration option(s) have been successfully programmed via labels and the reader has exited Programming Mode.	N/A	Reader sounds one high frequency beep and 4 low frequency beeps followed by reset beeps.
Label Programming Mode Cancel Item Entry	Cancel label has been scanned.	N/A	Reader sounds two times at low frequency and current volume.

Error Codes

' pon startup if the reader sounds a long tone this means the reader has not passed its automatic yelftest and has entered x ' ll ieldx eplaceable' nit Disolation mode of the reader is reset the sequence will be repeated z he following table describes the r kj flashes beep codes associated with an error found

NUMBER OF LED FLASHES/BEEPS	ERROR CORRECTIVE	ACTION
1 Configuration		Contact Helpdesk for assistance
2 Interface PCB
4 Reader Module
5 Laser Pointer (if so equipped)
6 Digital PCB
14 CPLD/Code Mismatch

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY)

INDICATION LEDS
Power-up Complete Yellow LED on
Reader Disabled by the HOST or the communication with HOST is not established	Yellow LED blinking ~1Hz
Data/labels are transmitted to the HOST	Yellow LEDs turned off for 100mSec
Programming Mode Yellow LED blinks quickly
Base and handheld are exchanging data Red LED blinks quickly
Battery charging in progress Red LED on
Battery charging complete Green LED on
Battery charger error Green LED and Red LEDs blink alterna-tively ~1Hz
No handheld is placed on the cradle Red and Green LEDs off

Base Station Button Indicators

BUTTON PUSH EVENT	CORDLESS	YELLOW INDICATOR	RED INDICATOR	GREEN INDICATOR
Push at power-up	Force device connection (Aladdin)	Off	Off	Slow blinkFast blink
< 1 sec (*)	UV LED On/Off	Off	Off	Off
1 to 5 sec	Paging	Off	Off	Fast blink
5 to 10 sec	Unlink (Only BT)	Off	Off	Slow blink
10 to 20 sec	Reset	Off	Fast blink	Off
> 20 sec	Restore factory defaults	Off	Slow blink	Off

(*) Only for models with UV Counterfeit Money Detector. See page 12 for more details

NOTES

Appendix B

Standard Defaults

z he|most|common|configuration|settings|are|listed|in|the|“j eault”|column|of|the|table|below|vage|references|are|also|provided|for|feature|descriptions|and|programming|barcodes|for|each|parameter|g |column|has|also|been|provided|for|recording|of|your|preferred|default|settings|for these|same|configurable|features

Table 52. Standard Defaults

Parameter Default Your Setting			Page Number
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore	Obey 39
USB Suspend Mode	Disable 39
RS-232 ONLY
Baud Rate	9600 42
Data Bits	8 Data Bits 43
Stop Bits	1 Stop Bit 43
Parity	None 44
Handshaking Control	RTS 45
RS-232/USB-Com
Intercharacter Delay	No Delay 47
Beep On ASCII BEL	Disable 47
Beep On Not on File	Enable 48
ACK Character	'ACK' 50
NAK Character	'NAK' 50
ACK NAK Timeout Value	200 ms		51
ACK NAK Retry Count	3 Retries		51
ACK NAK Error Handling	Ignore Errors Detected		52
Parameter	Default	Your Setting	Page Number
Indicate Transmission Failure	Enable 52
Disable Character	‘D’ 53
Enable Character	‘E’ 53
KEYBOARD WEDGE
Country Mode	U.S. Keyboard 56
Caps Lock State	Caps Lock OFF 59
Numlock	Numlock Key Unchanged 60
Send Control Characters	Control Character 00 61
Wedge Quiet Interval	100 ms 62
Intercharacter Delay	No Delay 63
Intercode Delay	100 ms 64
USB Keyboard Speed	1 ms 65
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad	Standard Keys 66
USB-OEM
USB-OEM Device Usage	Handheld Scanner 68
Interface Options	Ignore Host Configuration Commands		68
IBM 46xx
46xx Number of Host Resets	6		70
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format	IBM Standard Format		72
Interface Options	Ignore Scanner Configura-tion Host Commands		72
Wand Emulation
Wand Signal Speed	660 ms 74
Wand Polarity	Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low		74
Wand Idle State	High 75
Transmit Noise	Disable 75
Label Symbology Conversion	No conversion 76
Data Format
Global Prefix/Suffix	No Global Prefix Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)		78
Global AIM ID	Disable 79
GS1-128 AIM ID	Enable 80
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets	USA Set 81
Label ID Control	Disable 82
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters	No Mid Label ID Character 89
Case Conversion	Disable 90
Character Conversion	No Char Conversion 90
READING PARAMETERS
Double Read Timeout	0.6 Second 91
Label Gone Timeout	160 ms 93
Sleep Mode Timeout	Disable 94
Power On Alert	4 Beeps 96
Good Read: When to Indicate	After Decode 96
Good Read Beep Type	Mono 97
Good Read Beep Frequency	Medium 97
Good Read Beep Length	80 ms 98
Good Read Beep Volume	High 99
Good Read LED Duration	300 ms 100
Scan Mode	Trigger Single		101
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout	0.5 second		102
Stand Detection	Switch to Stand mode		103
Stand Mode Sensitivity	Medium		104
Scanning Active Time	5 Seconds		104
Flash On Time	1 Second		105
Flash Off Time	600 ms 105
Green Spot Duration	300 ms 106
Code Selection
Coupon Control	Enable UPCA coupon decoding		109
UPC-A
UPC-A Enable/Disable	Enable 110
UPC-A Check Character Transmission	Enable 110
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13	Don't Expand		111
Parameter Default Your Setting			Page Number
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission	Transmit 111
UPC-A Minimum Reads	1 112
UPC-E
UPC-E Enable/Disable	Enable 113
UPC-E Check Character Transmission	Send 113
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13	Don't Expand 114
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A	Don't Expand 114
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission	Transmit 115
UPC-E Minimum Reads	2 115
GTIN
GTIN Formatting	Disable 116
EAN 13 (Jan 13)
EAN 13 Enable/Disable	Enable 117
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission	Send 117
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character	Transmit 118
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion	Disable 118
EAN 13 Minimum Reads	1 119
ISSN
ISSN Enable/Disable	Disable 120
EAN 8
EAN 8 Enable/Disable	Enable 121
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission	Send 121
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13	Disable 122
EAN 8 Minimum Reads	1 122
UPC/EAN Global Settings
UPC/EAN Decoding Level	2 123
UPC/EAN Correlation	Disable 124
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check	Disable 124
In-Store Minimum Reads	2 125
Add-Ons
Optional Add-ons	Disable P2, P5 and GS1-128 126
Optional Add-On Timer	70 ms 127
Parameter	Default	Your Setting	Page Number
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer	Disable 130
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads	2 133
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads	1 134
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads	1 135
Code 39
Code 39 Enable/Disable	Enable 136
Code 39 Check Character Calculation	Don't Calculate 136
Code 39 Check Character Transmission	Don't Send 137
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission	Don't Transmit 138
Code 39 Full ASCII	Disable 138
Code 39 Quiet Zones	Auto 139
Code 39 Minimum Reads	2 140
Code 39 Decoding Level	3 141
Code 39 Length Control	Variable 142
Code 39 Set Length 1	2 143
Code 39 Set Length 2	50 144
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio	4 145
Code 39 Character Correlation	Disable 147
Code 39 Stitching	Enable 147
Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)
Code 32 Enable/Disable	Disable 148
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions	N/A 148
Code 32 Check Char Transmission	Don't Send 149
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission	Don't Transmit 149
Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical Code)
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable	Disable 148
Code 128
Code 128 Enable/Disable	Enable 151
Expand Code 128 to Code 39	Don't Expand 151
Code 128 Check Character Transmission	Send 152
Code 128 Function Character Transmission	Don't Send 152
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission	Disable 153
Parameter Default Your Setting			Page Number
Code 128 Quiet Zones	Auto 154
Code 128 Minimum Reads	1 155
Code 128 Decoding Level	3 156
Code 128 Length Control	Variable 157
Code 128 Set Length 1	1 158
Code 128 Set Length 2	80 159
Code 128 Character Correlation	Disable 160
Code 128 Stitching	Enable 160
GS1-128
GS1-128 Enable	Transmit in GS1-128 data format		161
ISBT 128
ISBT 128 Concatenation	Disable 162
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation	Disable 162
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode	Static 163
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout	200 msec 164
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options	Disable 164
Codablock F
Codablock F Enable/Disable	Disable 165
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable	Disable 165
Codablock F AIM Check	Enable check C 166
Codablock F Length Control	Variable 166
Codablock F Set Length 1	3 characters 167
Codablock F Set Length 2	100 characters 168
Interleaved 2 of 5
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable	Disable 169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation	Disable 169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission	Send 170
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads	2 192
2 of 5 Decoding Level	3 192
I 2 of 5 Length Control	Variable 173
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1	6 174
1 2 of 5 Set Length 2	50 175
1 2 of 5 Character Correlation	Disable 176
1 2 of 5 Stitching	Disable 176
Follett 2 of 5
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable	Disable 177
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable	Disable 177
Standard 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable	Disable 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation	Disable 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission	Send 179
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads	2 179
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level	3 180
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control	Variable 180
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1	8 181
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2	50 182
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation	Disable 183
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching	Disable 183
Industrial 2 of 5
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable	Disable 184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation	Disable 184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission	Enable 185
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control	Variable 185
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1	1 186
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2	50 187
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads	1 188
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching	Disable 188
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation	Disable 189
Code IATA
IATA Enable/Disable	Disable 190
IATA Check Character Transmission	Enable 190
Parameter	Default	Your Setting	Page Number
Datalogic 2 of 5
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable	Disable 191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation	Disable 191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads	2 192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level	3 192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control	Variable 193
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1	6 characters 194
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2	50 195
Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation	Disable 196
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching	Disable 196
Codabar
Codabar Enable/Disable	Disable 197
Codabar Check Character Calculation	Don't Calculate 197
Codabar Check Character Transmission	Send 198
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission	Transmit 198
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set	abcd/abcd 199
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match	Don't Require Match 199
Codabar Quiet Zones	Auto 200
Codabar Minimum Reads	2 201
Codabar Decoding Level	3 202
Codabar Length Control	Variable 202
Codabar Set Length 1	3 204
Codabar Set Length 2	50 205
Codabar Interdigit Ratio	4 206
Codabar Character Correlation	Disable 208
Codabar Stitching	Disable 208
ABC Codabar
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable	Disable 209
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode	Static 209
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout	200 msec 210
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation	Disable 211
Parameter Default Your Setting			Page Number
Code 11
Code 11 Enable/Disable	Disable 212
Code 11 Check Character Calculation	Check C and K 212
Code 11 Check Character Transmission	Send 213
Code 11 Minimum Reads	2 213
Code 11 Length Control	Variable 214
Code 11 Set Length 1	4 215
Code 11 Set Length 2	50 216
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio	4 217
Code 11 Decoding Level	3 219
Code 11 Character Correlation	Disable 220
Code 11 Stitching	Disable 220
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Enable/Disable	Disable 221
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation	Disable 221
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads	1 222
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Enable/Disable	Disable 223
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded GS1-128 Emulation	Disable 223
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads	1 224
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Length Control	Variable 224
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Set Length 1	1 225
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Set Length 2	74 226
GS1 DataBarTM Limited
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Enable/Disable	Disable 227
GS1 DataBarTM Limited GS1-128 Emulation	Disable 227
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads	1 228
Code 93
Code 93 Enable/Disable	Disable 229
Code 93 Check Character Calculation	Enable Check C and K 229
Code 93 Check Character Transmission	Disable 230
Code 93 Length Control	Variable 230
Code 93 Set Length 1	1 231
Code 93 Set Length 2	50 232
Code 93 Minimum Reads	1 233
Code 93 Decoding Level	3 234
Code 93 Quiet Zones	Auto 235
Code 93 Stitching	Enable 236
Code 93 Character Correlation	Disable 236
MSI
MSI Enable/Disable	Disable 237
MSI Check Character Calculation	Enable Mod10 237
MSI Check Character Transmission	Enable 238
MSI Length Control	Variable 239
MSI Set Length 1	1 239
MSI Set Length 2	50 240
MSI Minimum Reads	4 241
MSI Decoding Level	3 242
Plessey
Plessey Enable/Disable	Disable 243
Plessey Check Character Calculation	Enable Plessey std. check char. verification		244
Plessey Check Character Transmission	Enable 244
Plessey Length Control	Variable 245
Plessey Set Length 1	1 246
Plessey Set Length 2	50 247
Plessey Minimum Reads	4 248
Plessey Decoding Level	3 249
Plessey Stitching	Disable 250
Plessey Character Correlation	Disable 250
Code 4
Code 4 Enable/Disable	Disable 251
Code 4 Check Character Transmission	Send 251
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion	Enable 252
Parameter	Default	Your Setting	Page Number
Code 5
Code 5 Enable/Disable	Disable 252
Code 5 Check Character Transmission	Send 253
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion	Enable 253
Code 4 and 5 Common Configuration Items
Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level	3 254
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads	1 255
WIRELESS Features
Good Transmission Beep	Enable 259
Beep Frequency	Low 259
Beep Duration	80 msec 260
Beep Volume	High 261
Disconnect Beep	Enable 261
Base Station Beep	Enable 262
Leash Alarm	Disable 262
Automatic Configuration Update	Enable 264
Automatic Flash Update	Disable 265
Powerdown Timeout	30 minutes 266
Batch Mode	Disable 268
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay	No Delay 269
Direct Radio AutoLink	Unlink label required 270
Source Radio Address Transmission	Do not include 270
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character	No Delimiter Character 271
Features for Star Models Only
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout	2 seconds		272
STAR Radio Transmit Mode	ACK from cradle		272
Display (STAR model only)
- Contrast			274
- Font Size	Small		274
- Backlight	Off		275
- Display Mode	Local Echo mode		275
- Display Timeout	8 seconds		276
Parameter Default Your Setting			Page Number
Keypad Select	3C3D3E 278
Bluetooth-Only Features
BT Security Mode	Disable 280
Select PIN Code Length	Select 4-character BT PIN Code		281
Set PIN Code	31323334 = Default PIN Code is 1234		281
BT HID Variable PIN Code	Use Static PIN Code 282
BT HID ALT Mode	Disable 282
BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char	Disable 283
BT Poll Rate	20 ms 284
Laser Features
Laser Scan Angle	47 degrees 288
Laser Idle Mode	Disable 288
Bi-Directional Read Decoding	Enable 289
Always On Scan Mode Timeout	5 Hours 290

z he[sample]bar codes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology types

1D Bar Codes

UPC-A 1 23456 78901 2

EAN-13 978033029095

Code 39 ABCDEF

Code 128 Code 128

Sample Bar Codes — continued

DD

GS1 DataBar™ (RSS)

GS1 DataBar ^™ variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see GS1 DataBar ^™ Omnidirectional on page 221).

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked

Black and white barcode image with vertical stripes and a central diamond shape

10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

Barcode image with black and white vertical bars, no visible text or symbols beyond the pattern

1234890hjio9900mnb

GS1 DataBar™ Limited

08672345650916

GS1 DataBar™-14

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated

55432198673467

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

90876523412674

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

78123465709811

NOTES

Appendix D Keypad

'sethe:barcodes:in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits characters from a keypad

Keypad

HID Variable PIN Code

Cancel an incomplete HID Variable PIN Code

NOTES

Appendix E

Scancode Tables

Control Character Emulation

i ontrol character emulation selects from different scancode tables has listed in this appendix kach of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the tables z hese apply to edge and y h q ey board platforms

Control Character 00 .i charactersfromTTTtoTxUl [are[sent]as]controlcharacterdi trlOq eysPD specialkeysbarelocatedfromTx TtoTxg UR

Control Character 01 .i charactersfromTTtoTxUl daresentlascontrolcharacterdi trlOi apitalD q eyspecialkeysdarelocatedfromTx TtoTxg UR

Control Character 02 . ypecialkeyslarelocatedfromTTtoTxUI landcharactersfromTx TtoTxI klareintendedlaslanextendedgyi ooltableLs icrosoft indowsi odepageUVYV—lyeeD pageW VM

Single Press and Release Keys

on the following tables g r↓ means g lt right pressed and g r↑ means g lt right released and s o n R j efinitions for other keys are g ldg lt left DNDi rLi onrolx ight DNDi lLi onrolr eft DNDy hDL shift NRD z his method can be used for combining g lt p i onrold or ly hift with other keys

kexample 'cis onsidera'i ontrol character set to TTto of g ltx ight Og dis required before sending a label to the host it could be done by setting threelv prefix keys in this way 'Tx^^TxXUTx^g

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE

Table 53. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

NULL C+@

SOH C(S)+A

STX C(S)+B

ETX C(S)+C

EOT C(S)+D

ENQ C(S)+E

ACK C(S)+F

BEL C(S)+G

BS

HT TAB

LF C(S)+J

VT C(S)+K

FF C(S)+L

CR Enter

SO C(S)+N

SI C(S)+O

1x

DLE C(S)+P

DC1 C(S)+Q

DC2 C(S)+R

DC3 C(S)+S

DC4 C(S)+T

NAK C(S)+U

SYN C(S)+V

ETB C(S)+W

CAN C(S)+X

EM C(S)+Y

SUB C(S)+Z

ESC Esc

FS C+\

GS C+]

RS C+^

US C(S)+_

2x

SP

!

"

#

S

%

&

'

(

)

*

⊥

,

=

,

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

≤

=

≥

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

Q

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

-

6x

:

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

l

l

l

=

Del

8x

€

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent (keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

9x

F12

Home

End

Pg Up

Pg Dwn

↑

↓

←

→

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al↑

Cl↓

Cl↑

Cr↓

Ax

Cr↑

,

/

,,

...

†

‡

^

‰

Š

<

Š

<

Ø

Bx

=

⊥

2

3

,

μ

¶

,

'

°

»

1⁄4

1⁄2

3⁄4

;

Cx

À

Á

À

Ä

Ä

Ä

Æ

Ç

É

É

É

É

Î

Î

Î

Î

Dx

Đ

Ò O Ô

Ò O ×

∅ Ù Û

Ù Ú

Ý

þ ß

Ex

à

á

â

ã

ã

á

æ

ç

è

é

è

ë

ì

í

î

ï

Fx

ð

ñ

ò

ó

ó

ô

ö

÷

ø

ù

ú

ù

ü

ý

þ

ÿ

Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE — cont.

Table 54. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab

→

S+ Tab

Enter Keypd

Enter Ins

Pg Up

1x

Pg Dwn

Home

←

↓

↑

F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

Space

!

"

#

S

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

-

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

|

\

|

^

_

6x

`

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

8x €

'

f

"

...

†

‡

^

‰

Š

<

Š

<

Œ

9x

,

,

"

"

•

-

—

^

TM

§

,

œ

ž

Ÿ

Ax

NBSP

¡

¢

£

¿

¥

|

§

"

©

"

«

-

-

®

-

Bx

°

±

?

?

'

μ

¶

.

.

'

°

»

1⁄2

1⁄2

3⁄4

¿

Cx

À

Á

Â

Ã

Ã

Ã

Æ

Ç

Ê

Ł

Ê

Ê

ì

Í

Î

Î

Dx

Đ

Ô

Ó

Ô

Õ

Õ

×

∅

Ù

Ù

Ù

Û

Ÿ

þ

ß

Ex

à

á

â

ã

ã

à

æ

ç

è

é

è

ë

ì

í

î

ï

Fx

ð

ñ

ò

ó

ô

ô

ô

ø

ù

ú

ù

ù

ÿ

þ

ÿ

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode

Table 55. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE Xf

0x

Alt+000

Alt+001

Alt+002

Alt+003

Alt+004

Alt+005

Alt+006

Alt+007

BS

HT TAB

Alt+010

Alt+011 Alt+012

CR Enter

Alt+014 Alt+015

1x

Alt+016

Alt+017

Alt+018

Alt+019

Alt+020

Alt+021

Alt+022

Alt+023

Alt+024

Alt+025

Alt+026

ESC Esc

Alt+028 Alt+029 Alt+030 Alt+031

2x

A+032

A+033

A+034

A+035

A+036

A+037

A+038

A+039

A+040

A+041

A+042

A+043

A+044

A+045

A+046

A+047

3x

A+048

A+049

A+050

A+051

A+052

A+053

A+054

A+055

A+056

A+057

A+058

A+059

A+060

A+061

A+062

A+063

4x

A+064

A+065

A+066

A+067

A+068

A+069

A+070

A+071

A+072

A+073

A+074

A+075

A+076

A+077

A+078

A+079

5x

A+080

A+081

A+082

A+083

A+084

A+085

A+086

A+087

A+088

A+089

A+090

A+091

A+092

A+093

A+094

A+095

6x

A+096

A+097

A+098

A+099

A+100

A+101

A+102

A+103

A+104

A+105

A+106

A+107

A+108

A+109

A+110

A+111

7x

A+112

A+113

A+114

A+115

A+116

A+117

A+118

A+119

A+120

A+121

A+122

A+123

A+124

A+125

A+126

A+127

8x

€

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent (keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

9x

F12

Home

End

Pg Up

Pg Dwn

↑

↓

←

→

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al↑

Cl↓

Cl↑

Cr↓

Ax

Cr↑

A+0161

A-0162

A+0163

A+0164

A+0165

A+0166

A+0167

A+0168

A-0169

A+0170

A+0171

A-0172

A+0173

A+0174

A+0175

Bx

A-0176

A+0177

A+0178

A+0179

A+0180

A+0181

A-0182

A+0183

A+0184

A+0185

A+0186

A+0187

A+0188

A+0189

A+0190

A-0191

Cx

A+0192

A+0193

A+0194

A+0195

A-0196

A+0197

A+0198

A-0199

A+0200

A+0201

A+0202

A-0203

A+0204

A+0205

A+0206

A+0207

Dx

A+0208

A+0209

A+0210

A+0211

A-0212

A+0213

A+0214

A-0215

A+0216

A+0217

A+0218

A-0219

A+0220

A+0221

A+0222

A+0223

Ex

A-0224

A+0225

A+0226

A+0227

A+0228

A+0229

A+0230

A+0231

A+0232

A+0233

A+0234

A+0235

A+0236

A+0237

A+0238

A-0239

Fx

A-0240

A+0241

A+0242

A-0243

A+0244

A+0245

A+0246

A-0247

A+0248

A+0249

A-0250

A+0251

A-052

A+0253

A+0254

A+0255

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode — cont.

Table 56. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab

→

S+ Tab

Enter Keypd

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

1x

Pg Dwn

Home

←

↓

↑

F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

A-032

A+033

A+034

A+035

A-036

A+037

A+038

A+039

A+040

A+041

A+042

A+043

A+044

A-045

A+046

A+047

3x

A-048

A+049

A+050

A+051

A-052

A+053

A+054

A+055

A+056

A+057

A+058

A+059

A+060

A-061

A+062

A+063

4x

A-064

A+065

A+066

A+067

A-068

A+069

A+070

A+071

A+072

A+073

A+074

A+075

A+076

A-077

A+078

A+079

5x

A-080

A+081

A+082

A+083

A-084

A+085

A+086

A+087

A+088

A+089

A-090

A+091

A+092

A-093

A+094

A+095

6x

A-096

A+097

A+098

A+099

A-100

A+101

A+102

A+103

A+104

A+105

A-106

A+107

A+108

A-109

A+110

A+111

7x

A-112

A+113

A+114

A+115

A-116

A+117

A+118

A+119

A+120

A+121

A-122

A+123

A+124

A-125

A+126

A+127

8x

A+0128

A-0129

A+0130

A+0131

A-0132

A-0133

A+0134

A+0135

A-0136

A+0137

A+0138

A+0139

A+0140

A+0141

A-0142

A+0143

9x

A+0144

A-0145

A+0146

A+0147

A-0148

A-0149

A+0150

A+0151

A-0152

A+0153

A+0154

A+0155

A+0156

A+0157

A-0158

A+0159

Ax

A+0160

A+0161

A-0162

A+0163

A+0164

A+0165

A-0166

A+0167

A+0168

A-0169

A+0170

A+0171

A-0172

A+0173

A+0174

A+0175

Bx

A+0176

A+0177

A-0178

A+0179

A+0180

A+0181

A-0182

A+0183

A+0184

A-0185

A+0186

A+0187

A-0188

A+0189

A+0190

A+0191

Cx

A-0192

A+0193

A+0194

A+0195

A+0196

A-0197

A+0198

A+0199

A-0200

A+0201

A+0202

A+0203

A+0204

A+0205

A+0206

A-0207

Dx

A-0208

A+0209

A+0210

A+0211

A+0212

A-0213

A+0214

A+0215

A-0216

A+0217

A+0218

A+0219

A+0220

A+0221

A+0222

A-0223

Ex

A+0224

A+0225

A-0226

A+0227

A+0228

A-0229

A+0230

A+0231

A+0232

A-0233

A+0234

A+0235

A-0236

A+0237

A+0238

A+0239

Fx

A+0240

A-0241

A+0242

A+0243

A+0244

A+0245

A-0246

A+0247

A+0248

A-0249

A+0250

A+0251

A-052

A+0253

A-0254

A+0255

Digital Interface

Table 57. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

NULL C+@

SOH C(S)+A

STX C(S)+B

ETX C(S)+C

EOT C+D

ENQ C(S)+E

ACK C(S)+F

BEL C(S)+G

BS

HT TAB

LF C(S)+J

VT C(S)+K

FF C(S)+L

CR Enter

SO C(S)+N

SI C(S)+O

1x

DLE C(S)+P

DC1 C(S)+Q

DC2 C(S)+R

DC3 C(S)+S

DC4 C(S)+T

NAK C(S)+U

SYN C(S)+V

ETB C(S)+W

CAN C(S)+X

EM C(S)+Y

SUB C(S)+Z

ESC Esc

FS C(S)+\

GS C+]

RS C(S)+^

US C(S)+_

2x

Space

!

“

#

S

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x 0 |

2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 :

;<=>?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x ' a

b c d e f g h i

j k l m n o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

8x

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent (keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

9x

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

↑

↓

←

→

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Table 58. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

BS

Tab

à

S+ Tab

Enter Keypd

Enter

Ins

1x

←

↓

↑

F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

Space

!

“

#

S

%

&

*

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

;

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x a b c d e f g h i

j k l m n o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

IBM31xx 102-key

Table 59. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

NULL C+@

SOH C(S)+A

STX C(S)+B

ETX C(S)+C

EOT C+D

ENQ C(S)+E

ACK C(S)+F

BEL C(S)+G

BS

HT TAB

LF C(S)+J

VT C(S)+K

FF C(S)+L

CR Enter

SO C(S)+N

SI C(S)+O

1x

DLE C(S)+P

DC1 C(S)+Q

DC2 C(S)+R

DC3 C(S)+S

DC4 C(S)+T

NAK C(S)+U

SYN C(S)+V

ETB C(S)+W

CAN C(S)+X

EM C(S)+Y

SUB C(S)+Z

ESC Esc

FS C(S)+\

GS C+]

RS C(S)+^

US C(S)+_

2x

Space

!

“

#

S

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x 0 |

2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 :

;<=>?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Del

8x

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent (keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

9x

F12

Enter

Reset

Inscrt

Delete

Field -

Field +

Enter paddle

Printl

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Ax

Cr ↑

Table 60. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab

→

S+ Tab

Enter Keypd

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

1x

Pg Dwn

Homc

←

↓

↑

F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

Space

!

“

//

S

%

&

*

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

c

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Del

IBM XT

Table 61. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

NULL C+@

SOH C(S)+A

STX C(S)+B

ETX C(S)+C

EOT C+D

ENQ C(S)+E

ACK C(S)+F

BEL C(S)+G

BS C(S)+H

HT TAB

LF C(S)+J

VT C(S)+K

FF C(S)+L

CR Enter

SO C(S)+N

SI C(S)+O

1x

DLE C(S)+P

DC1 C(S)+Q

DC2 C(S)+R

DC3 C(S)+S

DC4 C(S)+T

NAK C(S)+U

SYN C(S)+V

ETB C(S)+W

CAN C(S)+X

EM C(S)+Y

SUB C(S)+Z

ESC Esc

FS C(S)+\

GS C+]

RS C(S)+^

US C(S)+_

2x

Space

!

“

#

S

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x 0 |

2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 :

;<=>?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Del

8x

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent (keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

9x

F12

IHome

End

Pg Up

Pg Dwn

↑

↓

←

→

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Ax

Cr ↑

Table 62. Scancode Set when Control Character 02

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab

→

S+ Tab

Enter Keypd

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

1x

Pg Dwn

Home

←

↓

↑

F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

Space

!

"

#

S

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

-

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

'

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Del

Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252

Windows-1252 is a character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by default in the legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other Western languages.

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

00

NUL0000

STX0001

SOT0002

ETX0003

EOT0004

ENQ0005

ACK0006

BEL0007

BS0008

HT0009

LF000A

VT000B

FF000C

CR000D

SO000E

SI000F

10

DLE0010

DC10011

DC20012

DC30013

DC40014

NAK0015

SYN0016

ETB0017

CAN0018

EM0019

SUB001A

ESC001B

FS001C

GS001D

RS001E

US001F

20

SP0020

!0021

"0022

#0023

$0024

%0025

&0026

'0027

(0028

)0029

*002A

+002B

,002C

-002D

.002E

/002F

30

0030

10031

20032

30033

40034

50035

60036

70037

80038

90039

:003A

;003B

<003C

=003D

>003E

?003F

40

@0040

A0041

B0042

C0043

D0044

E0045

F0046

G0047

H0048

I0049

J004A

K004B

L004C

M004D

N004E

O004F

50

P0050

Q0051

R0052

S0053

T0054

U0055

V0056

W0057

X0058

Y0059

Z005A

[005B

\005C

]005D

^005E

_005F

60

`0060

a0061

b0062

c0063

d0064

e0065

f0066

g0067

h0068

i0069

j006A

k006B

l006C

m006D

n006E

o006F

70

p0070

q0071

r0072

s0073

t0074

u0075

v0076

w0077

x0078

y0079

z007A

{007B

|007C

}007D

~007E

DEL007F

80

€20AC

,201A

f0192

,,201E

...2026

†2020

‡2021

^02C6

%2030

Š0160

<2039

CE0152

Ž017D

90

,2018

,2019

"201C

"201D

•2022

-2013

-2014

^02DC

m2122

Š0161

>203A

oe0153

Ž017E

Ÿ0178

A0

NBSP00A0

;00A1

¢00A2

£00A3

¤00A4

¥00A5

|00A6

§00A7

"00A8

@00A9

a00AA

«00AB

-00AC

-00AD

®00AE

-00AF

B0

°00B0

±00B1

200B2

300B3

'00B4

μ00B5

¶00B6

·00B7

,00B8

100B9

°00BA

»00BB

1⁄400BC

1⁄200BD

3⁄400BE

¿00BF

C0

À00C0

Á00C1

Ã00C2

Ã00C3

Ä00C4

Â00C5

Â00C6

Ç00C7

È00C8

É00C9

Ê00CA

È00CB

Ì00CC

Í00CD

Î00CE

Ï00CF

D0

Đ00D0

Ñ00D1

Ò00D2

Ó00D3

Õ00D4

Õ00D5

Õ00D6

×00D7

∅00D8

Ù00D9

Ù00DA

Û00DB

Ù00DC

Ý00DD

Þ00DE

ß00DF

E0

à00E0

á00E1

ã00E2

ã00E3

ã00E4

ã00E5

æ00E6

ç00E7

è00E8

é00E9

ê00EA

ê00EB

ì00EC

í00ED

î00EE

ì00EF

F0

õ00F0

ñ00F1

ò00F2

ó00F3

ô00F4

õ00F5

ö00F6

÷00F7

ø00F8

ù00F9

ú00FA

û00FB

ù00FC

ý00FD

þ00FE

ý00FF

NOTES

A

Aladdin™ Tr w

B

barcodes

cancelTTtvr

numeric barcodesΠt vr

RS-232

baudTrate Twv

RS-232 parameters

parity ^T v9lTrxxlTvrIITvIITVV

battery

WARNINGSTrv

Beeper

Pitch, Good ReadTT9x

Volume, Good ReadTT99

Beeper, Good ReadTT9w

C

Cable PinoutsTt t p

Clear to Send 9r

Code 39 FormatTx

Conversion, caseTT9p

Conversion, character ^T 9pl ^t rr

Convert to Code 128TTxw

Convert to Code 39TTxw

Coupon Control r p9

CTS TT 9r

D

Datalogic Aladdin™ Tr w

DefaultsTTt t v

Dimensions t x

E

Error Codes t t

ErrorsTTt t

G

Good Read, BeeperTT9w

PitchTT9x

VolumeTT99

Good Read, Beeper -Π9w

Good Read, Beeper Pitch -T9x

Good Read, Beeper Volume -TT99

Green SpotTt tr

H

Handheld ScannerTtwy

Host ResetsTTxp

I

IBM interface selectionTTt p

IBM Standard Format x

Idle State (wand)TTxv

IndicationsTTt tr

Interface CableTTr y

ISSN ^T Tr p

K

keyboard supportTTvw

KEYBOARD WEDGE (KBW) interface selectionTt r

Keyboard Wedge Connection Tr 9

M

Mixed OEM Standard + Code 39 Format x

N

numbers lock keyTTwp

Index

P

Performance Characteristics t y

Physical Characteristics t x Pitch - Good Read, Beeper 9x

Polarity (wand) x

Prefix/Suffix ^T xylIt pv

Product Specifications t x

Programming Barcodes r w

R

Read, Beeper - GoodTT9w

Read, Beeper Pitch - GoodTT9x

Read, Beeper Volume - GoodT99

Reading Configuration Barcodes y

Request to Send 9r

RS-232 interface selectionTTp

RS-232 Serial Connection Try

RTSTT 9r

S

sample barcodes

code 128TTt x

code 39 t x

interleaved 2 of 5TTt y

Scancode Tables t vv

select digits/characters t vr

Serial OutputTTt t p

Signal Speed (wand) x

Standard Cable Pinouts t t p

SuffixTxyIt pv

Symbology ConversionTTxw

symbology types t x

T

Table Top ScannerTwy

U

UPCTTrrp

USB ConnectionTr 9

USB interface selection t p

V

Volume – Good Read, BeeperT99

W

Weight t x

X

XON/XOFFT 9

ASCII Chart

ASCII Char.	Hex No.	ASCII Char.	Hex No.	ASCII Char.	Hex No.	ASCII Char.	Hex No.
NUL	00	SP	20	@	40	'	60
SOH	01	!	21	A	41	a	61
STX	02	'	22	B	42	b	62
ETX	03	#	23	C	43	c	63
EOT	04	$	24	D	44	d	64
ENQ	05	%	25	E	45	e	65
ACK	06	&	26	F	46	f	66
BEL	07	'	27	G	47	g	67
BS	08	(	28	H	48	h	68
HT	09	)	29	I	49	i	69
LF	0A	*	2A	J	4A	j	6A
VT	0B	+	2B	K	4B	k	6B
FF	0C	,	2C	L	4C	l	6C
CR	0D	-	2D	M	4D	m	6D
SO	0E	.	2E	N	4E	n	6E
SI	0F	/	2F	O	4F	o	6F
DLE	10	0	30	P	50	p	70
DC1	11	1	31	Q	51	q	71
DC2	12	2	32	R	52	r	72
DC3	13	3	33	S	53	s	73
DC4	14	4	34	T	54	t	74
NAK	15	5	35	U	55	u	75
SYN	16	6	36	V	56	v	76
ETB	17	7	37	W	57	w	77
CAN	18	8	38	X	58	x	78
EM	19	9	39	Y	59	y	79
SUB	1A	:	3A	Z	5A	z	7A
ESC	1B	;	3B	[	5B	{	7B
FS	1C	<	3C	\	5C	|	7C
GS	1D	=	3D	]	5D	}	7D
RS	1E	>	3E	^	5E	~	7E
US	1F	?	3F	_	5F	DEL	7F

DATALOGIC

www.datalogic.com

©2011-2016 Datalogic, Inc. All rights reserved. Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U.

Datalogic ADC, Inc.

959 Terry Street | Eugene | OR 97402 | USA

Telephone: [phone] | Fax: [phone]

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines representing text or data

820050514 (Rev H) February 2016